Buick - Terraza - Owners Manual - 2005 - 2005 (2)

2005 Buick Terraza Owner Manual Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats ............................................... 1-3 Rear Seats ............................................... 1-7 Safety Belts ............................................. 1-16 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-34 Airbag System ......................................... 1-54 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-67 Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Windows ................................................. 2-24 Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-26 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-30 Mirrors .................................................... 2-41 OnStar® System ...................................... 2-42 HomeLink® Wireless Control System ........... 2-44 Storage Areas ......................................... 2-48 Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-54 Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Climate Controls ...................................... 3-25 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-31 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-45 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-77 M Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2 Towing ................................................... 4-37 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-41 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-42 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-46 Tires ...................................................... 5-47 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-77 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-85 Electrical System ...................................... 5-86 Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-93 ..................................... 6-1 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10 Index ................................................................ 1 Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, and the BUICK Emblem are registered trademarks and the name TERRAZA is a trademark of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 05TERRAZA A First Edition ii How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things. Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. © 2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Do Not,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not let this happen.” {CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not, you or others could be hurt. iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator. Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. iv If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component, gage, or indicator, reference the following topics: • • • • • • • Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 Features and Controls in Section 2 Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 Climate Controls in Section 3 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3 Audio System(s) in Section 3 Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle: v ✍ NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ......................................................1-3 Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-3 Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-3 Eight-Way Power Seats ...................................1-4 Heated Seats .................................................1-4 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5 Head Restraints .............................................1-7 Rear Seats .......................................................1-7 Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7 Captain Chairs ...............................................1-7 Third Row Seat ............................................1-12 Safety Belts ...................................................1-16 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-16 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-20 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-21 Driver Position ..............................................1-21 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-28 Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-29 Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-29 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults ..........................1-31 Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-34 Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-34 Child Restraints .............................................1-34 Older Children ..............................................1-34 Infants and Young Children ............................1-37 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-40 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-43 Top Strap ....................................................1-44 Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-45 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-46 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ....................................1-48 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ............................................1-48 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ....................................1-50 Airbag System ...............................................1-54 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-56 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-59 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-60 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-60 1-1 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-61 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-62 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................................................1-67 1-2 Restraint System Check ..................................1-67 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-67 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ............................................1-68 Front Seats Six-Way Power Seats Manual Passenger Seat Use the lever located on the front of the seat to adjust the seat forward or rearward. Pull up the lever to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the six-way power seat control is located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat. Your vehicle may also have a passenger’s six-way power seat. • Move the front of the control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion up or down. • Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move the seat back and forth with your body. • Lift up or push down on the whole control to move the entire seat up or down. • To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide the control forward or rearward. 1-3 Eight-Way Power Seats Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the eight-way power seat control is located on the outboard sides of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • To recline the seatback, press the vertical control rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical control forward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5 for more information on reclining seatbacks. Heated Seats Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the heated seat buttons are located on the climate control panel. This feature will heat the lower cushions of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • Move the front of the control up or down to adjust Press this button once to turn on the driver’s side heated seat to the high setting. the front portion of the cushion up or down. • Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down. • Lift up or push down on the whole control to move the entire seat up or down. • To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide the control forward or rearward. 1-4 Both indicator lights to the right of the symbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the high setting. Press the button a second time to go to the low setting. One indicator will be lit. Press the button a third time to turn the heated seat off. Press this button once to turn on the front passenger’s heated seat to the high setting. Reclining Seatbacks Both indicator lights to the left of the symbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the high setting. Press the button a second time to go to the low setting. One indicator will be lit. Press the button a third time to turn the heated seat off. The heated seats will turn off when the ignition is turned to LOCK and will resume operation when the ignition is turned to RUN, unless the button is manually turned off. To adjust a manual seatback, pull up on the lever located on the outboard side of the driver’s or front passenger’s seats. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it’s locked into position. Pull up on the lever, and the seat will go to its original upright position. Your vehicle may have power reclining seatbacks. See Eight-Way Power Seats on page 1-4. 1-5 {CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can not do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt can not do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. 1-6 The lap belt can not do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps used to adjust, remove, and reinstall the seats. By using the levers and straps in the correct order, you can easily remove the seats from the vehicle. When you put the seats back in the vehicle, follow the label on the back of the seat for proper location. Captain Chairs Your vehicle has captain’s chairs that can be adjusted forward or rearward as well as seatbacks that can be adjusted. Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs (Second Row) Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. The head restraints are adjustable on the first and second row seats. They are not adjustable on the third row seat, if equipped. To adjust a head restraint, slide it up or down. The second row captain’s chairs can be adjusted forward or rearward. There are two manual adjustment bars on each seat. One is located under the front of the seat cushion. The other one is located under the rear of the seat cushion. Lift up either bar to slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. 1-7 Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks {CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Use the recliner lever to move the seatback to the desired position. It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean forward, taking the weight off the seatback. Lift up on the recliner lever and fold the seatback forward. The seatback will lock into place when you push it back to the upright position. The armrests can be lowered or raised for entering or exiting the vehicle. 1-8 Removing the Captain’s Chairs 2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins and removed from the vehicle. 1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to release the rear hooks from the floor pins. 1-9 Replacing the Captain’s Chairs {CAUTION: {CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing the seat, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. {CAUTION: Do not put the seats in so they face rearward because they will not latch that way. For the second row, if you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward. A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it. Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright position, the seat belts are on the correct side of the seats and the seats are in the full rear position before beginning this procedure. 1-10 1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins. 2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins. 3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly attached. 1-11 Third Row Seat Your vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a full bench seat and may come with the convenience center. See Convenience Center on page 2-53 for more information. The third row seat can be removed and replaced, or with the seatback folded, it will lie flat with the convenience center. Folding the Seatback(s) To fold down either side of the 50/50 split bench seat, pull up on the lever located on the back of the seat you want to fold, and push the seatback down until it is locked into place. Returning the Seatback to an Upright Position {CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. To raise the seatback, do the following: 1. Move the second row seat completely forward by using the manual adjustment bar under either the front or rear of the seat cushion. 2. From the passenger’s or driver’s side sliding door, pull up on the lever to release the seatback, then push up on the seatback to raise the seat. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into the upright position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into place. 1-12 Removing the Third Row Seat 1. Remove the convenience center, if equipped. See Convenience Center on page 2-53 for more information. 2. Make sure all items are off the seat. 3. Put the seatback in its folded position before removing the seat. See “Folding the Seatback(s)” earlier in this section. 4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release handle until the pin indicators are fully out. This indicates that the rear latches are released from the floor. For ease of removing the seat, squeeze the handle with the palm of your hand up. 5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensure the latches are clear of the floor pins. 6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle. The release handle can be used to carry the seat. 1-13 Installing the Third Row Seat {CAUTION: {CAUTION: A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing the seat, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. Do not put the third row seat in so it faces rearward because it will not latch that way. The seat has to go in before the convenience center. See Convenience Center on page 2-53 for more information. 1-14 For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in the folded position before beginning this procedure. 1. From the rear of the vehicle, place the front hooks of the seat onto the front floor pins in the third row. To do this, the seat will need to be angled approximately 8-10 inches (20-25 cm) from the floor so the front hooks clear the rear floor pins and rear floor cups. Use the release handle to guide the seat into place. If the front hooks are not attached correctly, the rear latches will not attach to the rear set of floor pins. 2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat. {CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 4. Return the seatback to its upright position. See “Returning the Seatback to an Upright Position” earlier in this section. 3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is locked down. The indicator pins will no longer stick out when the seat is properly latched into place. 1-15 Safety Belts {CAUTION: Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. {CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. 1-16 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-33. In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. 1-17 Put someone on it. 1-18 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel... 1-19 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. 1-20 A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an accident — even one that is not your fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Driver Position Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-34 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-37. Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We will start with the driver position. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 1-21 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-34. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. 1-22 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 1-23 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-24 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. A: The belt is over an armrest. 1-25 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-26 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-27 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you. Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. To move it down, push down on the button and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. 1-28 A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position Lap-Shoulder Belt To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-21. All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear one properly. The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again. Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 1-29 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-34. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. 1-30 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. {CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear safety belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head. 1-31 The third row (if equipped) has one guide for each outboard position. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seatback. 1-32 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The guide must be on top of the belt. 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-29. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. Slide the guide into the storage pocket. 1-33 Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety belts for the driver and right front passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash. Child Restraints Older Children Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-68. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 1-34 Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly. {CAUTION: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can not properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time. 1-35 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a second row position, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults on page 1-31. {CAUTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 1-36 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint. {CAUTION: People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint. 1-37 {CAUTION: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. 1-38 For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs. {CAUTION: Newborn infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints. {CAUTION: The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. 1-39 Child Restraint Systems An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. 1-40 A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. 1-41 Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. For many years, add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. 1-42 When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Q: When securing an aftermarket child seat in a bucket seat, I am unable to get the seat fastened in snugly enough. What should I do? A: With some child seats, it may be difficult to tighten the vehicle belts so that there is less side-to-side or front-to-back movement of the child seat. A replacement buckle, which makes it easier to secure your child seat, is available from your dealer at no charge to you. Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. {CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. General Motors recommends that rear-facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. 1-43 Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it. Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is anchored properly. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. 1-44 If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it. See Head Restraints on page 1-7. Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say. Top Strap Anchor Location Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger’s position or at the third row passenger’s-side position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top strap in these positions. Second Row In the second row, there is a top strap anchor for each seating position. The anchors are located at the rear base of the seat. 1-45 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find anchors in each seating position in the second row. This system, designed to make installation of child restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether strap. Third Row A. Top Strap Anchor B. Seatback Release Latch In the third row (if equipped), there is a top strap anchor for the driver’s-side position or for the center position. The anchor is located on the back of the seat near the center of the seatback. The anchor can accommodate one top strap. A. Lower Anchorage B. Lower Anchorage 1-46 C. Top Tether To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH system has a label on the seatback. The labels are located at each lower anchor position, near the base of each second row seating position. {CAUTION: A. Lower Anchorage B. Lower Anchorage In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint designed for that system. If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to its anchorage points, the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. 1-47 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position 1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position you want to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion. See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap on page 1-44 if the child restraint has a top strap or top tether. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. For vehicles with a third row, there is no top strap anchor in the passenger’s-side position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. 3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-44. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top tether from the top tether anchorage and then disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH anchorages. 1-48 If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-43. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-50 In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35 for more information on this including important safety information. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. {CAUTION: If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. There is no top strap anchor at the right front seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-44 if your child restraint has one. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. General Motors recommends that rear-facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat position, move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-3,Six-Way Power Seats on page 1-3 or Eight-Way Power Seats on page 1-4. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62. General Motors recommends that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off. If your child restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-3, Six-Way Power Seats on page 1-3 or Eight-Way Power Seats on page 1-4. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35. 1-51 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-52 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or START. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set. If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-53 Airbag System Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags. Side impact airbags are available for the driver and right front passenger. If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will appear on the airbag covering on the side of the seatback closest to the door. Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: {CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them. CAUTION: 1-54 (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past. Side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. {CAUTION: Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. 1-55 The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34 for more information. {CAUTION: Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-34 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-37. Where Are the Airbags? There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-56 The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door. 1-57 {CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact airbag. If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door. 1-58 When Should an Airbag Inflate? The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down. In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the restraint according to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40.2 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.) Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object were moving. • If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object does not deform. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation would not likely help the occupants. Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag. See Airbag System on page 1-54. Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. 1-59 Side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact. What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the airbag modules are located in the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door. 1-60 How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in many types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact airbag. What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be hot for a short time. These components include the steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the side of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. {CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. 1-61 • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 7-9. • Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag system. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service. Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s seatback, the airbag may not work properly. You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact airbag. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key to RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada 1-62 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions. The driver’s airbag or airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the passenger’s airbag or airbags should be enabled (may inflate) or not. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. {CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. General Motors recommends that rear-facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off. 1-63 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags if: • the right front passenger seat is unoccupied • the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child restraint • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat • a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time • the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints • or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger’s airbag or airbags, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are off. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-50. 1-64 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer. The passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag or airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are active. For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags, depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s airbag or airbags. {CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34 for more on this, including important safety information. 1-65 Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. {CAUTION: Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system. {CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. The airbag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-66 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system? A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module (located under the driver’s seat), or the instrument panel can affect the operation of the airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness right away. Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-67 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash {CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If you have had a crash, do you need new safety belts or built-in child restraint parts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, then you may need new LATCH system parts. 1-68 If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in child restraint, LATCH system or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt, built-in child restraint or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision. If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section. If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor assemblies will be there to help protect you in a collision. After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34. Section 2 Features and Controls Keys ...............................................................2-3 Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5 Doors and Locks ............................................2-10 Door Locks ..................................................2-10 Power Door Locks ........................................2-11 Delayed Locking ...........................................2-12 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-13 Lockout Protection ........................................2-13 Dual Sliding Doors ........................................2-13 Power Sliding Door (PSD) ..............................2-16 Liftgate ........................................................2-22 Windows ........................................................2-24 Power Windows ............................................2-25 Power Rear Quarter Windows ........................2-25 Sun Visors ...................................................2-26 Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-26 Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-26 PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-28 PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-28 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-30 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-30 Ignition Positions ..........................................2-30 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-31 Starting the Engine .......................................2-31 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-32 Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-33 All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-36 Parking Brake ..............................................2-37 Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-38 Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-39 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-39 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-40 Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-40 Mirrors ...........................................................2-41 Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-41 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-41 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-42 Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-42 OnStar® System .............................................2-42 2-1 Section 2 Features and Controls HomeLink® Wireless Control System ...............2-44 HomeLink® Wireless Control System Operation .................................................2-45 Storage Areas ................................................2-48 Glove Box ...................................................2-48 Cupholder(s) ................................................2-49 Overhead Console (With Rail) ........................2-49 Overhead Console (Without Rail) ....................2-50 Floor Console Storage Area ...........................2-50 2-2 Folding Tray ................................................2-51 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-51 Convenience Net (With Rear Convenience Center) .................................2-52 Convenience Net (Without Rear Convenience Center) .................................2-52 Convenience Center ......................................2-53 Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-54 Memory Seat ...............................................2-54 Keys {CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The children or others could be badly injured or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. This vehicle has a double sided key for the ignition and the driver’s door lock. Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system. The key has a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a replacement key or any additional key is needed, you must purchase this key from your dealer. The key will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made. 2-3 Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key® III on page 2-28 for more information on programming your new key. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-42 for more information. Remote Keyless Entry System Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2-4 This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: • Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. • Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5. • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. Remote Keyless Entry System Operation You can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors and the liftgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. The remote keyless entry transmitter shown here is for a vehicle equipped with the remote vehicle start feature and dual power sliding doors. / (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this feature, you can start the engine from outside the vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at the end of this section for more detailed information. " (Unlock): When you press unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s door will unlock. If you press unlock again within five seconds, all the doors and the liftgate will unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlock the first time you press unlock, see “FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system, the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 for more details. When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle the turn signal lamps will flash to let you know the command was received. Q(Lock): The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle will only contain the buttons specific to your vehicle’s factory installed remote system features. To lock all doors and the liftgate, press the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Power Door Locks on page 2-11 for more details on the power door lock features. If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system, the remote keyless entry transmitter’s lock button may arm the system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 for more details. 2-5 When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps may flash to let you know the command has been received. If you press the lock button again, within five seconds, the horn will sound and the turn signal lamps may flash to let you know the vehicle is already locked. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 for additional information. * + (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors, your remote keyless entry transmitter will have two buttons that have a van symbol on them. The van symbol on the left is for the driver’s side sliding door and the van symbol on the right is for the passenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold the passenger’s or driver’s side button, with the van symbol on it, to open or close the selected power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16. L (Remote Alarm): When you press the horn button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to attract attention, if needed. You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the remote keyless entry transmitter only when the power sliding door override switch(es) on the overhead console is active. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for additional information. Press this button again to stop the alarm from sounding. Remote Power Sliding Door Operation + (Power Sliding Door): If your vehicle has one power sliding door, the remote keyless entry transmitter will have a button with a van symbol on it. Press and hold this button to open or close the power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16. If the sliding door is closed and the power sliding door button on the transmitter is pressed and held, the vehicle’s doors will be unlocked and then the power sliding door will open. If the power sliding door has been locked using the manual door lock lever, you will need to unlock the power sliding door before it can be opened with the keyless entry transmitter sliding door button. If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, the driver’s side power sliding door will not open completely. Do not try to force the door. Once the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally. 2-6 Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle 1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist it to separate the halves. Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about three years. 2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not use the metal flanges to pop out the battery. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably time to change the battery. 3. Replace the battery. Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in. 5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons for seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter. 6. Check the transmitter operation. 2-7 Remote Vehicle Start This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles. / (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has the remote vehicle start feature, the remote keyless entry transmitter will have a button with this symbol on it. An increased range of operation is provided with the remote keyless entry transmitter that has the remote vehicle start button. The vehicle can be started from approximately 180 feet (60 m) away. However, the operating range may be less while the engine is running and you will need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on. Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel. 2-8 To start the engine using the remote start feature, do the following: 1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter, equipped with the remote vehicle start button, at the vehicle. 2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start button until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for at least two seconds, if the vehicle’s lights are not visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked. 3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running. After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to RUN. The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two. If it is the vehicle’s first remote start, and the engine is still running, repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a 10 minute time extension. Ten minutes will be added to the remaining minutes of the first remote start. The 10 minute time extension is considered a second remote start. After two remote starts have been provided, the vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to RUN and then back to LOCK using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again. If you enter the vehicle after a remote start, and the engine is running, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the RUN position to drive the vehicle. To manually shut off the engine after a remote start, do any of the following: • Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off. • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. • Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to RUN and then back to LOCK. The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if: • The remote start system is disabled. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. • • • • • • • The vehicle’s key is in the ignition. The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not closed. The hazard warning flashers are on. There is an emission control system malfunction. The engine coolant temperature is too high. The oil pressure is low. Two remote vehicle starts have already been provided. The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two. 2-9 Doors and Locks Door Locks {CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers — especially children — can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening. 2-10 There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with the key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from the outside with your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. If your vehicle has power door locks, you may be able to unlock all of the doors and the liftgate when you insert the key, turn it toward the front of the vehicle, and hold it there for one second. You may be able to lock all of the doors when you insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. Power Door Locks From the inside, press the top of the power door lock switch, located on either front door, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. From the inside, use the manual or power door locks. To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on the manual lever. To lock either front door from the inside, push the manual lever forward. With the content theft-deterrent system, the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 for more details. 2-11 You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside by pressing the bottom of the power lock switch on either front door. With the content theft-deterrent system, the power door lock switch may cause the system to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 for more details. If the liftgate has been unlocked with the power door locks, you will not need the key to open it. Squeeze the handle located above the license plate to open the liftgate. This is also true if you use the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-4. Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is active. The doors may be locked immediately by repeating any of the above actions more than one time. If a door remains open, without any other door being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after approximately 45 seconds. If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock the doors. To turn the delayed locking feature off or on, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. Delayed Locking Sliding Door Delayed Locking This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be delayed until all doors have been closed for approximately five seconds. If either sliding door is open when you use the power door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door that is open will not lock. Normally the delayed locking feature will be used to lock the sliding door after it has been closed. To activate the delayed locking feature, do one of the following: • Press the driver’s door power lock switch one time while the driver’s door is open. • Press the passenger’s door power lock switch one time while the passenger’s door is open. • Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter one time while any door is open. 2-12 The sliding door delayed locking feature will lock your sliding door(s) in situations where the delayed locking feature does not apply or was overridden or programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking” earlier in this section. Shortly after the last sliding door is closed, all the doors will lock. Programmable Automatic Door Locks All of the doors will lock automatically when you move your shift lever to a forward gear. All doors will unlock automatically when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P). If someone needs to get out while you are not in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or, have that person use the manual lever or the power door lock switch. When the door is closed again, it will lock when the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 kph). Use the manual lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door. To change the way automatic door locks operate, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. With the automatic door locks feature, you can lock or unlock the doors at any time, either manually or using the power door lock switches. Lockout Protection The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be locked with the power door lock switch. This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the key could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always remember to take the key with you. Dual Sliding Doors To open either sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear. If you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in a detent position. To move the door forward, you must first pull the door past the open detent position. The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, do not try to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s side sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally. 2-13 Sliding Door Lock {CAUTION: If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring someone. To make sure the door does not slam shut be sure to hold it open until everyone is clear of the door, and only then allow it to slowly close. 2-14 Sliding Door Security Lock Your vehicle is equipped with sliding door security locks that helps prevent young children or other passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using the inside door handle. To use one of these locks, do the following: 1. Open the sliding door. 2. On the inside of the sliding door(s), on the front edge of the door will be a lock. Push the lever up to engage the lock. Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle by moving the manual lever down. Unlock it by moving the lever up. With the power door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay feature. See Delayed Locking on page 2-12 and DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. 3. Close the door. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door. 2-15 If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you can prevent power opening of the sliding door from the passenger power sliding door (psd) activation switch by pressing the psd second row passenger override (deactivation) switch located on the overhead console. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16. If you want to open the sliding door while the security lock is on, unlock and open the door from the outside. You should let adults and older children know how the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If you do not, adults or older children who ride in the rear will not be able to open the sliding door from the inside while the security lock feature is in use. Canceling the Sliding Door Security Lock 1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from the outside. 2. Push the security lock lever all the way down. 3. Close the door. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door. The sliding door lock will now work normally. 2-16 Power Sliding Door (PSD) If your vehicle has this feature, you can open and close the power sliding door(s) using the switches inside your vehicle. You can also operate the sliding door(s) with your remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-4. {CAUTION: Leaving your children or pets unattended in your vehicle can be dangerous. They could operate the power sliding door. A child or others could be injured. Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Power Sliding Door (PSD) Switches Your vehicle also has passenger power sliding door activation switch(es). Your vehicle will have one of the following sets of switches located on the overhead console switchbank. If your vehicle has a single power sliding door (PSD), you have these switches. Driver’s Side and Passenger’s Side PSD Switches PSD Activation Switch If you have a single PSD, this switch is located in front of the passenger side sliding door. If your vehicle has dual PSDs, the switches are located in front of both sliding doors. PSD Second Row Passenger Override (Deactivation) Switch If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors, you have these switches. The PSD activation and PSD second row passenger override (deactivation) is one switch. Passenger PSD Activation Switch 2-17 Power Sliding Door Operation The power sliding door(s) will only open if the transaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in PARK (P) to close the door(s). There are several ways to open and close the power sliding door(s). • If your vehicle has a single power sliding door, press the bottom of the overhead console PSD activation switch. • If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors, press the top of the driver’s side and/or passenger’s side overhead console PSD switch. • Press the passenger PSD activation switch. This switch will also stop a moving door immediately. • Press the power sliding door button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. • To manually open the power sliding door(s) while the switch(es) are in the activation position, pull and release the inside or outside door handle to release the door latch. The door will fully open. 2-18 • To manually close the power sliding door(s) while the switches are in the activation position, pull the inside or outside door handle or the edge of the door. Move the door about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release it. The door will close completely and latch. If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot be unlocked and opened using the overhead console PSD activation switch(es) or the passenger PSD activation switch(es). The power sliding door must either be manually unlocked or unlocked using the power door unlock switch located on the driver’s or front passenger’s armrest, and then opened using the overhead or passenger PSD activation switch(es). The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be used to open the power sliding door(s). If the vehicle is locked, press the power sliding door button(s) and all doors will unlock and the sliding door(s) will open. See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5. If the power sliding door has been manually locked, you must unlock the PSD before it can be opened. Notice: If you leave the power sliding door on when you go through an automatic car wash, the door may accidentally open. Be sure the power sliding door is turned off when going through a car wash. If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the process of closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a chime will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door(s) is not completely closed. Also, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate if the door is open. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. Stop the vehicle and close the door. {CAUTION: If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power sliding door latches closed, the door may reverse to the open position. A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and be injured. Always make sure the power sliding door is closed and latched before you drive away. If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s) while it is closing, the door will automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing door, or stronger. The force of the closing door increases significantly as the door approaches the latched position. 2-19 The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, do not try to force the sliding door. When the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally. {CAUTION: You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door. 2-20 {CAUTION: If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring someone. To make sure the door does not slam shut, turn on the power sliding door feature. Then if the door closes, it will close under the control of the power door system. Power Sliding Door Second Row Passenger Override (Deactivation) To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door(s) by using the passenger PSD activation switch, press the overhead console deactivation switch. The door can still be manually opened from the inside or outside with the override (deactivation) switch on. To open a power sliding door(s) manually when the overhead console switch is in override (deactivation) position, pull the inside or outside door handle and slide the door all the way back. To close the door(s) manually when the override switch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position, pull the inside or outside door handle and slide the door all the way forward to the latched position. To stop the door(s) immediately while the door(s) is opening or closing, press the bottom of the PSD override (deactivation) switch. Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keyless entry will open and close the door unless the door has been manually locked using the mechanical slider. Resetting the Power Sliding Door The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at all because of the following conditions: • A low voltage or dead battery • A disconnected battery • If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21, LHPSD/fuse 24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 are removed or blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-87 for more information about your fuse panel. 2-21 If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door may need to be reset. If your vehicle has the dual power sliding doors, both doors will have to be reset. To reset a door, do the following: 1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked and securely closed. 2. Turn the ignition to LOCK. 3. If the power sliding door overhead console switch is in the override (deactivation) position, return to the activation position. 4. Open the sliding door using the remote keyless entry transmitter, overhead console switch, or passenger switch. Allow the door to travel fully open. If the door does not travel to the fully open position, press the overhead console switch to the override (deactivation) position and slide the door fully open and closed. Check for foreign objects in the tracks. Repeat the procedure starting with Step 1. If the door resists travel to the fully open position, see your dealer for service. 2-22 Liftgate To unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, use the remote keyless entry transmitter. For more information, see Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5. You can also use the power door lock switch to lock and unlock the liftgate. Open the liftgate using the handle located above the license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area. Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could break the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above the liftgate is clear before opening it. {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate: • Make sure all other windows are shut. • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25. • If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-40. To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then firmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with the liftgate open, even slightly. 2-23 Windows {CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-24 Power Windows Power Rear Quarter Windows The switches on the driver’s door armrest control the front windows when the ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-31. The driver’s power window switch has two down positions. The first position lowers the window normally. To raise the window, pull up the front of the switch. Express-Down Window To activate the express-down feature, push the AUTO switch all the way down to the second position, then release it. The window will lower completely. To stop the window from lowering all the way, pull up on the front of the switch. Your vehicle has power rear quarter windows. This switch, located in the overhead console switchbank, is used for opening and closing the power rear quarter windows. Press the top of the switch to open the windows; both windows will open. The windows will continue to open as long as the switch is pressed, until they are fully opened. Press the bottom of the switch with the symbol to close both windows. The windows can be closed fully or partially, depending on how long the switch is pressed. The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to use the power rear quarter windows. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-31. 2-25 Sun Visors Content Theft-Deterrent To block out glare, you can swing down the visors and slide them along the rod to cover different areas of the front window. You can also remove them from the center mount and swing them to the side. Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system. Lighted Vanity Mirror Your vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors. Pull down the sun visor and flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you flip up the cover. Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. A light located on top of your instrument panel, near the center of the vehicle next to the windshield, will flash slowly to let you know that the system has been armed. While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch. Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or a key, or turns the ignition to RUN. The horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash for up to two minutes. 2-26 Arming with the Power Lock Switch Arming with Your Key Your alarm system will arm when the key is removed from the ignition and you use the driver’s power door lock switch, with the driver’s door open or the passenger’s door power door lock switch with the passenger’s door open to lock the vehicle. If you would like to turn on power door lock switch arming, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to lock the driver’s door. The security light will flash to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed. If you would like your key not to arm the system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. When the security light flashes quickly the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed. Arming Confirmation Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Your alarm system will arm if the key is not in the ignition and you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors. The security light will flash to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed. If remote unlock confirmation is on, the turn signal lamps will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm system has disarmed. If you would not like the turn signal lamps to flash, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Your alarm system will disarm when you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed. 2-27 Disarming with Your Key Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key to unlock the driver’s door. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed. If you would like your key not to disarm the alarm system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. PASS-Key® III Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2-28 Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. PASS-Key® III Operation Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key® III (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passive theft deterrent system. This means you do not have to do anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition. When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes. If the engine does not start and the security message comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key® III to have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-87. It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to have keys made and programmed to the system. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. To program the new key, do the following: 1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it. 2. Insert the original, already programmed key into the ignition lock cylinder and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer for service. 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF and remove the key. 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN within 10 seconds of removing the previous key. 5. The security message will turn off once the key has been programmed. It may not be apparent that the security message went on due to how quickly the key is programmed. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed. If you are ever driving and the security message comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III system at this time. If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to have a new key made. 2-29 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle Ignition Positions The key can be turned to one of four positions while in the ignition switch. New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information. 2-30 A (LOCK): This is the only position from which you can remove the key. This position locks your ignition and transaxle. Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you can operate the electrical accessories, such as the radio. C (RUN): This is the position to which the switch returns after the engine is started and the ignition key is released. This is the position for driving. Even while the engine is not running, RUN can be used to operate your electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel warning lights. D (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the ignition key. The switch will return to RUN for driving. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) With RAP, your power windows and the audio system will continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off or until either door is opened. If a door is opened, the power windows and audio system will shut off. Starting the Engine Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in any other position — that is a safety feature. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine warms up. Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. 2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down while you turn the key to START. Do this until the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key. 2-31 3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still will not start, or starts briefly but then stops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the temperature. When the engine starts, release the key and the accelerator pedal. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine might not perform properly. Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord. To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. 2-32 Automatic Transaxle Operation {CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. Maximum engine speed is limited when you are in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components from improper operation. There are several different positions for your shift lever. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels. It is the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your Saturn retailer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle. The Saturn retailer can give you the best advice for that particular area. Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the brake pedal while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that the system is operating properly. 2-33 If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-39. {CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-38. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. 2-34 REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-31. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. {CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at high speed may damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you are: • Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You will shift down to the next gear and have more power. Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then. Warm-Up Shift Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment and defrost the windows more quickly. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25 for more information. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): • When driving on hilly, winding roads • When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears • When going down a steep hill 2-35 SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2). Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going slow enough. 2-36 Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place. All-Wheel Drive If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction when needed. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions. You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive system is functioning properly. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-12 for more information. Parking Brake The parking brake is located under the instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot while you push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot from the parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37. 2-37 Shifting Into Park (P) {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake with your left foot. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). 2-38 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P). Torque Lock Parking Over Things That Burn If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-38. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Shifting Out of Park (P) Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition, you must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-33. {CAUTION: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. 2-39 Engine Exhaust {CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: • Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. • Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. • Repairs were not done correctly. • Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: • Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and • Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-40 Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. {CAUTION: Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2-40. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See Winter Driving on page 4-27. Mirrors {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). Manual Rearview Mirror While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment can lessen glare from the headlamps behind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward for daytime use; push it back for night use. Outside Power Mirrors The controls, located on the driver’s door, operate both outside rearview mirrors. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-38. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. Push the top control to the left or right to choose either the driver’s or passenger’s outside rearview mirror. Leave the control in the center position to prevent moving the mirrors once they are adjusted. 2-41 Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust the position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror so that you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind it, while sitting in a comfortable driving position. Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward to prevent damage when going through car washes or confined spaces. Outside Convex Mirror {CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther away than they really are. 2-42 Outside Heated Mirrors The outside rearview mirrors will heat to help clear them of ice, snow, and condensation when the rear window defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger” in Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25. OnStar® System OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology, wireless communications, and call centers to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com. OnStar® Services OnStar® Personal Calling For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). Safe and Sound Plan • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • Emergency Services • Roadside Assistance • Stolen Vehicle Tracking • AccidentAssist • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert • Remote Diagnostics • Online Concierge Directions and Connections Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • Driving Directions • RideAssist • Information and Convenience Services OnStar® Virtual Advisor Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates, stock quotes, entertainment and more. Customize your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information. 2-43 HomeLink® Wireless Control System HomeLink® complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ® HomeLink , a combined universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional HomeLink® information can be found on the Internet at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. 2-44 Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. HomeLink® Wireless Control System Operation Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter. Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the Internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency. Programming HomeLink® Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels: 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons, releasing only when the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and/or third transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons. 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. 2-45 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” later in this section. 4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons. 5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling-code equipped device (most commonly, a garage door opener). 2-46 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. 8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds, then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code equipped device. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous programming. Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to “time out” in the same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator by using the “Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink® ” with the following: Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ” to complete. Using HomeLink® Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. Erasing HomeLink® Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons do the following: 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section. Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button” following this section. 2-47 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink® button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink® button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section. Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following: 1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash. 2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink® indicator light turns off. 3. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at www.homelink.com. 2-48 Storage Areas Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store many items. If the vehicle has an extended wheelbase, it can carry even larger items. The floor pins that are used to attach the seats, can be used to secure larger loads. There may be additional storage areas behind the seats. Glove Box If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the lock and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the glove box, pull the latch release. The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door is partway open, then pull the door down if you need it fully opened. To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up past the detent. To lock the glove box, put your key into the lock and turn the key clockwise. Cupholder(s) Storage Bin There are cupholders located below the center instrument panel switchbank. The cupholders have a rubber liner that can be removed, so that larger cups can fit into the cupholders. You can also remove the liner to clean it. Your vehicle may have a storage bin located on the overhead rail that you can use for storage. To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Push the tray back when not in use. Overhead Console (With Rail) If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead console, it may contain the following: • Reading lamps. See Front Reading Lamps on page 3-19 or Rear Reading Lamps on page 3-19. • Switchbank. See Overhead Console Switchbank on page 3-20. • OnStar® System buttons. See OnStar® System on page 2-42. • Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45. • HomeLink® Transmitter buttons. See HomeLink® 1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the desired location. 2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting it with one hand. 3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it 90 degrees. Wireless Control System on page 2-44. 2-49 The contents of the bin should never weigh more than 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg). Always make sure to close and latch the bin before driving. Overhead Console (Without Rail) If your vehicle has an overhead console without the rail system, it has two reading lights, a courtesy light, and a switchbank. See Overhead Console Switchbank on page 3-20 for more information. Floor Console Storage Area 4. Firmly press down making sure the latch is flat with the ribs (A) on the storage bin. 5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the latch on the opposite side of the storage bin. 6. Reverse these steps in order to remove the storage bin. 2-50 If your vehicle has a storage compartment located on the front console below the front cupholders. Pull up and then forward on the handle to open the storage compartment. Folding Tray Luggage Carrier {CAUTION: Your vehicle may be equipped with folding convenience trays located between seats. To use each tray lift up on the handle located on its front end, while pulling up on the tray to lock it into place. There are four cupholders on each tray. If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying could be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle. If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. 2-51 Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened. Convenience Net (With Rear Convenience Center) Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, from falling out of the vehicle when the liftgate is opened. Install the convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate. To use the convenience net, do the following: 1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both sides of the liftgate opening. The label on the net should be in the upper left corner. 2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rear edge of the rear convenience center. When not in use, it is recommended that you take down the convenience net to extend the life of the net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. 2-52 Convenience Net (Without Rear Convenience Center) Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate. To use the convenience net, do the following: 1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both sides of the liftgate opening. The label on the net should be in the upper left corner. 2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on the floor. 3. Once you have loaded items into the net, stretch the higher side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it firmly in place. The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can. When not in use, it is recommended that you take down the convenience net to extend the life of the net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Convenience Center {CAUTION: If any removable convenience item is not secured properly, it can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to secure any such item properly. Your vehicle may have a convenience center. It provides extra storage space for the rear of the vehicle. To open the convenience center, pull up on the door latch located on the front of the cover. The convenience center cover has two automatic prop rods to hold it up and in place. To close the convenience center cover, you must pull one of the prop rod linkages toward you while holding onto the door latch and lower the convenience center cover to close it. Removing the Convenience Center 1. Make sure that all items are off the convenience center and that it is empty. 2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of the convenience center, counterclockwise until the knob is loose. 3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pull up on the convenience center to remove it from the vehicle. Replacing the Convenience Center 1. Make sure the third row seat is properly installed in the vehicle. See Third Row Seat on page 1-12 for more information. If the third row seat is not in the vehicle with the convenience center, the convenience center will not be locked into the correct position in the vehicle. 2. Make sure that the convenience center is empty and closed. 3. Lift the convenience center up and into the rear of the vehicle. 2-53 4. Slide the convenience center in and align it to the rear seat. Vehicle Personalization 5. Press down on the front of the convenience center so the center is aligned on the sill mounting bracket. Memory Seat 6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight. 7. Pull up on the convenience center to make sure it is locked into place. The cover of the convenience center can be left in its upright position while the vehicle is moving. If your vehicle has this feature, the controls for the memory function are located on the driver’s door. The convenience center and the third row seat both have a maximum weight capacity of 400 lbs (181.6 kg). Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seating position. The settings for these features can be personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2. Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memory buttons labelled 1 and 2 on the driver’s door. 2-54 To store the memory settings, do the following: 1. Adjust the driver’s seat to your preference. 2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds. A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored. To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the preceding steps, but press the other numbered memory control button. To recall the memory settings, press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P). A single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled. To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at any time, press one of the memory buttons or power seat controls. Easy Exit Seat The control for the easy exit seat function is located on the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2. The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall the desired driver’s seat position when exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position can be personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2. To store the easy exit seat position for driver 1 or 2, do the following: 1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory control. The seat will move to the stored memory position. 2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position. 3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for three seconds. A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored for the identified driver 1 or 2. To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the preceding steps, but press the other numbered memory control button. To recall the easy exit seat position, press the easy exit seat button on the memory control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). A singe chime will sound and the seat will move to the stored exit position. If an easy exit seat position has not been stored, the default position is all the way rearward. 2-55 ✍ NOTES 2-56 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Horn .............................................................3-6 Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Windshield Washer .........................................3-9 Cruise Control ..............................................3-10 Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14 Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-15 Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Automatic Headlamp System .......................3-15 Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16 Interior Lamps Control ...................................3-17 Dome Lamp .................................................3-17 Entry Lighting ...............................................3-17 Delayed Lighting ...........................................3-18 Exit Lighting .................................................3-18 Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-19 Rear Reading Lamps ....................................3-19 Cargo Lamp .................................................3-19 Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19 Overhead Console Switchbank .......................3-20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-20 Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-23 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-24 Climate Controls ............................................3-25 Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-25 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28 Rear Climate Control System .........................3-29 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-31 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-32 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-33 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-33 Tachometer .................................................3-33 Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-33 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-34 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-34 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-35 Charging System Light ..................................3-37 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-37 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-38 3-1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-39 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-39 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-40 Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-42 Security Light ...............................................3-43 Cruise Control Light ......................................3-43 Highbeam On Light .......................................3-44 Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44 Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-44 Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45 DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-46 DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-51 DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) .......3-68 3-2 Audio System(s) .............................................3-77 Setting the Time ...........................................3-77 Radio with CD ..............................................3-77 Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-96 Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-96 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-110 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-112 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-112 Radio Reception .........................................3-113 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-113 Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-114 Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-114 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-114 ✍ NOTES 3-3 Instrument Panel Overview 3-4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28. B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-112. D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-32. E. DIC Controls (If Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45. F. Traction Control System Button. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. G. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-35. I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-77. J. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-14. K. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps Control on page 3-17. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16. L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11. M. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-37. N. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6. O. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See Cruise Control on page 3-10. P. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25. Q. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). See Heated Seats on page 1-4. R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-48. 3-5 Hazard Warning Flashers Horn Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to sound the horn. The hazard warning flasher button is located near the center of the instrument panel. Tilt Wheel A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key is not in. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals will not work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. 3-6 To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever. Then move the wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever • Z Rear Window Wiper. See Windshield Washer on page 3-9. • = Rear Window Washer. See Windshield Washer on page 3-9. For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-14. Turn and Lane-Change Signals The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: • G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7. • 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8. The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. • Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8. • N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on page 3-9. • L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer on page 3-9. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. 3-7 As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the fuse. See Bulb Replacement on page 5-42 and Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-87. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you. When the high beams are on, this light will appear on the instrument panel cluster. If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working. Turn Signal On Chime If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to turn it off. If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it back on. 3-8 To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you. Flash-to-Pass When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you to momentarily turn on the high beams. This will signal that you are going to pass. When you release the lever, they will turn off. Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. 8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the band on mist longer. 9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off. N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay. 6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second solid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off. 1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second solid band past the delay settings. Windshield Washer LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold the windshield washer paddle with this symbol on it to wash your windshield. The washers and wipers will operate. When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier. {CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. 3-9 Rear Window Washer/Wiper The controls for the rear window washer/wiper are located on the end of the turn signal/multifunction lever. 9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the rear washers/wipers off. Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this position to turn the rear wipers on. = (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to this position to wash and wipe the rear window. 3-10 Cruise Control {CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. The cruise control lever is located below the windshield wiper control on the right side of the steering wheel. R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push the lever down to set the cruise speed. If the cruise speed is already set this position can be used to coast or decelerate from a higher speed. CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruise control speed. Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever up to resume the cruise control speed, or to accelerate when passing another vehicle. J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press the button on the end of the lever to turn the cruise control on. Press it again to turn cruise control off. Cruise control allows a speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more to be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again. 3-11 Setting Cruise Control {CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Push the button at the end of the cruise control lever to turn the cruise control on. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed. 3. Push down on the cruise control lever and release it. This will set the speed in cruise control. 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. This symbol will appear on the instrument panel cluster when the cruise control is set. This symbol will disappear when the brakes are applied or the cruise control is cancelled. It will reappear when the set cruise speed is resumed. Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. But the cruise control does not need to be reset. Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, the cruise control lever can be pushed upward toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position to return to the preset cruise speed. The vehicle will return to and stay at the preset cruise speed. If the cruise control lever is pushed up and held toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position, the vehicle speed will increase until the lever is released or the brakes are applied. Do not continue to hold the lever in the plus (resume/accelerate) position, unless a faster speed is desired. 3-12 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while using cruise control: • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push up on the cruise control lever toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position, then release the lever and take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed. • Push up and hold the cruise control lever toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then release the cruise control lever. To increase the vehicle’s speed in very small amounts, push up briefly on the cruise control lever and release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle will speed up approximately one mph (1.6 km/h). The acceleration feature will only work after the cruise control speed has been set by pushing the cruise control lever down to the set position. • Push the cruise control lever downward toward the minus (set/coast/decelerate) position until a lower speed is reached, then release it. • To slow down in very small amounts, push the cruise control lever downward toward the minus (set/coast/decelerate) position briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle will slow down approximately one mph (1.6 km/h). Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier. 3-13 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, the accelerator pedal might have to be used in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, the brakes might have to be applied, or the transaxle might have to be shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Doing either of these things will take the vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to use the cruise control if the brakes constantly have to be applied, or the vehicle continuously needs to be shifted to a lower gear. Exterior Lamps The control to the left of the steering column operates the exterior lamps. Cancelling Cruise Control To cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruise control lever forward, or step lightly on the brake pedal. Doing either of these things will only end the current cruise control session, but the set speed will be retained in memory. Push the button at the end of the cruise control lever to turn the system off. Erasing Speed Memory When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off, the cruise control set speed memory is erased. 3-14 9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to toggle off all lamps. This is a momentary control that will spring back to AUTO when released. This momentary control will turn the automatic headlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps on and off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first sold in Canada, this is only true when the transaxle is in PARK (P). AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to set your headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exterior lamps on and off automatically depending on how much light is available outside the vehicle. Due to the momentary switch design, your automatic lights may be disabled even if the control is in the AUTO position. ; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following: • Taillamps • Instrument Panel Lights 5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature, if equipped, will automatically activate the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for about 30 seconds and when all of the following conditions are met. • The exterior lamp control is in AUTO. • The headlamps have not already been activated by automatic lighting. • The automatic lighting feature has not been disabled using the exterior lamp control. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-14 for additional information. If the wipers are activated for over 30 seconds and the exterior lamp control is in the parking lamps position, or the automatic lighting feature has been disabled using the exterior lamp control, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver Information Center, if equipped. Headlamps on Reminder If you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime once the driver’s door is opened. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Automatic Headlamp System Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional Daytime Running Lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. 3-15 A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered. The DRL system will make front parking and turn signal lamps come on in daylight when the following conditions are met: • The ignition is on. • The exterior lamps control is off. When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel will not be lit up. When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will come on automatically. When it is bright enough outside, the exterior lamps will turn off and the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any time you need to. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take approximately 30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16. 3-16 To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic headlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp control to off after starting the vehicle. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Instrument Panel Brightness The knob to adjust the instrument panel brightness is located in the center of the interior lamp controls. Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights and counterclockwise to dim them. Interior Lamps Control The interior lamp control is located to the right of the exterior lamp controls on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outer knob to this position to have your interior lamps remain off while any door is open. 1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position to turn the interior lamps on while any door is open and when the ignition key is removed from the ignition. + (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob to this position to turn the interior lamps on. Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panel brightness, described earlier in this section. Dome Lamp The dome lamp is located in the headliner and has two buttons to manually turn it on or off. The dome lamp will come on each time you open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override feature. See Interior Lamps Control on page 3-17. Entry Lighting With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is illuminated so that you can see inside before you enter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for 20 seconds if you unlock your door using your key or the remote keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in LOCK. After 20 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before the 20 seconds if you do one of the following: • Lock all the doors using the key. • Press lock on the power door lock switch. • Press lock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the liftgate are closed. 3-17 The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 3-18. To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. Delayed Lighting The delayed lighting feature will continue to illuminate the interior for 20 seconds after all doors have been closed, so that you can find your ignition and buckle your safety belt at night. Delayed lighting will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY. After 20 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 20 seconds have passed if you do one of the following: • Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. • Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter. • Lock all doors using the power door lock switch or the key. To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. 3-18 Exit Lighting With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition. If you turn the ignition key to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will also fade out if you lock the doors with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter. When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the liftgate are closed. The interior lamps may stay on for up to 20 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 3-18. To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68. Front Reading Lamps Battery Run-Down Protection There are two reading lamps and one courtesy lamp in the overhead console. To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp. The courtesy lamp will come on each time you open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override feature. See Interior Lamps Control on page 3-17. Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the interior lamps on. If you leave any interior lamps on while the ignition is in lock or off, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps will not come back on again until you do one of the following: Rear Reading Lamps There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner. To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp. There may also be a reading lamp in the second row, integrated with the dome lamp. To turn the second row reading lamp on or off, press the button next to the lamp lens. Cargo Lamp • Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY • Open a closed door, or close and reopen a door. • Turn the interior lamps on if they are in the door or override position. • Turn the interior lamps to the door or override position and then to on again if the interior lamp control is in the on position. If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes. The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle, above the liftgate opening, and does not have a switch. The cargo lamp will come on each time you open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override. See Interior Lamps Control on page 3-17. 3-19 Overhead Console Switchbank The overhead console switchbank is located in the overhead console. This switchbank may include the following: • Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es). See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16. • Power Rear Quarter Windows. See Power Rear Quarter Windows on page 2-25. • Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3-20. If your vehicle does not have some of these options, there will be a blank. 3-20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it is designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how close these objects are from your rear bumper. Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, near the rear window. It has three color-coded lights used to provide distance and system information to the driver. {CAUTION: Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist system, the driver must check carefully before backing up. The system does not operate above typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while parking. And, the system does not detect objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. URPA can be turned off by pressing the rear park aid disable switch located in the overhead console switchbank. While the system is disabled, an indicator light will be lit on the switch. You will not see any lights on the rear display if the switch is in the off position. So, unless you check carefully behind you before and when you back up, you could strike children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind you, and they could be injured or killed. Whether or not you are using rear park assist, always check carefully behind your vehicle before you back up and then watch closely as you do. 3-21 How the System Works Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When the system turns on, the three lights on the display will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you that the system does not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur: Description English Metric amber light 5 ft 1.5 m amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m amber/amber/red lights & continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m amber/amber/red lights flashing & continuous chime 1 ft 0.3 m A chime will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away. 3-22 URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it must be within detection range behind the vehicle. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The light may flash red when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see your dealer. If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions behind the vehicle. Accessory Power Outlets Your vehicle may be equipped with a front accessory power outlet located below the climate controls on the instrument panel. It can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio. Pull the cover down to use the accessory power outlet. When not in use, keep the cover on. The rear accessory power outlet is located on the rear compartment on the driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of the cover and put the cover in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover. When not in use, always cover the rear accessory power outlet with the protective cap. Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating. Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only. 3-23 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment with a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to use equipment that requires more than the limit, a protection circuit will cut the power supply. To reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the ignition key to OFF or ACC and then back on. The power will automatically restart when equipment that operates within the limit is plugged in. The power outlet is located behind the third row seats on the passenger’s side rear quarter trim panel. The power outlet is not designed for the following electrical equipment and they may not work properly: • Equipment with high initial peak wattage: compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools. • Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc. 3-24 Climate Controls Operation Dual Climate Control System Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. Your vehicle may have a dual climate control system. With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. To change the current mode, select one of the following: H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle. The right knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section. 3-25 Outside Air: This mode will be automatically selected when your vehicle is in any mode except maximum air conditioning. 9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan. The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate. Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and passenger’s levers to increase or decrease the air temperature inside your vehicle. # (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air conditioning system on or off. When it is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that air conditioning is activated. You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected temperature. 3-26 On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal. # MAX (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the right knob to this position for maximum air conditioning. This will select air conditioning and recirculation for maximum cooling of your vehicle. Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. This mode will automatically be selected when you select maximum air conditioning. ( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on the heated seats. The button on the left controls the driver’s seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats on page 1-4 for additional information. Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode. - (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. 0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically turn off recirculation and run the air conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. 3-27 Rear Window Defogger Outlet Adjustment The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to open the air outlets. < (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated. l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to close the air outlets. The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. Operation Tips • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. 3-28 Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the direction of the airflow. inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block the flow of air into your vehicle. • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system. • Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively. Rear Climate Control System Your vehicle may have a rear climate control system that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed for the rear seating area. This system works with the main climate control system in your vehicle. 9 (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increase or decrease airflow to the rear seating area. Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off. AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rear passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow to the rear seating area. Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control system that allows the rear passengers to adjust the temperature and fan speed for the rear seating area. This lever is located below the main climate control system on the instrument panel. Use this lever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat passengers. 3-29 When the front climate control is in AUX and the rear climate control fan or temperature button is pressed, the display will show the same airflow modes as the front climate control system. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25 t r (Decrease Setting): Press this button to decrease the fan or temperature setting when arrows are active in the display. [ u (Increase Setting): Press this button to increase the fan or temperature setting when arrows are active in display. 9 (Fan): Press this button to increase or decrease fan speed. After pressing this button, arrows and a fan will appear in the display. The arrows indicate that to increase or decrease fan speed, you need to press either the left or right arrow button. The displayed arrows and fan will disappear after a few seconds. The front control must be in AUX position to enable adjustment of the temperature and fan speed on the rear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing the fan or temperature button on the rear climate control will show a DISABLED message on the rear seat entertainment system display. 3-30 b (Temperature): Press this button to increase or decrease temperature. After pressing this button, arrows and a temperature scale will appear in the display. The arrows indicate that to increase or decrease temperature, you need to press either the left or right arrow button. The displayed arrows and temperature scale will disappear after a few seconds. Rear Air Outlets The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions. Also, keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console, between and under the front seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow to the rear seating area. For more information on how to use the main climate control system, see Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25. For information on ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28. Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. 3-31 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages. United States version shown, Canada similar 3-32 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. The new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can display how far you have driven since you last reset it. Safety Belt Reminder Light For more information see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on. 3-33 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will be provided for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62 for more information. The passenger safety belt light will also be provided and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should have the passenger buckle their safety belt. This chime and light will be repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light will be provided. 3-34 Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light comes on if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-54. This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. {CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the airbag system may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle. The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped). 3-35 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags are enabled (may inflate). {CAUTION: If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger’s seat, it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat. 3-36 If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62 for more on this, including important safety information. If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service. {CAUTION: If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come on together, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the airbags. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-34. Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working. It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. 3-37 If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38 and Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-37. {CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle may have this light. If it does, the anti-lock brake system warning light should come on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 3-38 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light Your vehicle is equipped with a traction control system warning light. The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons: • If you turn the system off by pressing the traction control button. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. • If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down. • If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the red gage lamp turns on, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-24. 3-39 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. 3-40 Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good, and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. • Light On Steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: • • • • Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. 3-41 If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. Oil Pressure Light If you have low engine oil pressure, this light will stay on after you start your engine, or come on when you are driving. Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. 3-42 This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by your GM dealer. The oil light could also come on in three other situations: • When the ignition is on but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a test to show you it is working. The light will go out when you turn the ignition on. If it does not come on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away. • If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink on and then off. • If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a moment. This is normal. {CAUTION: Security Light For information regarding this light, see Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-26. Cruise Control Light This light comes on whenever you set your cruise control. Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information. 3-43 Highbeam On Light Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on. This light will come on when the high-beam headlamps or the Flash-to-Pass feature is in use. Here are four things some owners ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8. Fuel Gage gage reads. For example, the gage read half full, but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it. • The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking or speeding up. • The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition is turned off. Low Fuel Warning Light The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. United States Canada When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon. 3-44 Driver Information Center (DIC) Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer. The DIC buttons are located on the center of the instrument panel, below the center outlets. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display WELCOME DRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is used, and then the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers, fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system information, and compass display, if equipped. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. In addition, the DIC displays phone numbers that are called using the OnStar® system, if equipped. See OnStar® System on page 2-42. If equipped, the outside air temperature automatically appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display when viewing all of the information screens, except for the oil life screens. If the outside air temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C), the temperature reading will toggle between displaying the outside temperature and the word ICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display, the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit) will appear on the display. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. The DIC also allows some features to be customized or personalized, if equipped. See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 for more information. 3-45 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the instrument panel. The buttons are the information, set/reset, and menu buttons. q (Menu): Press this button to display the units, language, personalization, if equipped, compass zone and compass calibration, if equipped. See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 for more information. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. Information Button Items DIC Buttons Q4R (Information): Press this button to scroll through the following items: Odometer Press the information button until the odometer displays. This mode shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Trip A and Trip B Q4R (Information): Press this button to display the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed, average speed, fuel economy, battery voltage, and oil life. Press the information button until A or B displays. This mode shows the current distance traveled in either miles or kilometers since the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the same time. r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip odometer is displayed. The display will show the odometer on the top line and the trip odometer information, either A or B, on the bottom line. 3-46 Time Elapsed Fuel Range Press the information button until TIME ELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like a stopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point to another. Each of the fields for the hours, minutes, and seconds are two numeric digits. Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays. This mode shows the approximate number of remaining miles or kilometers the vehicle can be driven without refueling. Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the set/reset button to start the timing feature. Press the set/reset button again to stop it. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature will automatically start timing where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold the set/reset button for approximately 1.5 seconds. The display will return to zero. Average Speed Press the information button until AVERAGE SPEED displays. This mode shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speed recorded since the last reset of this value. To reset the value, press the information button to display AVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold the set/reset button. The display will return to zero. Fuel range is based on several factors, including distance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc. This estimate will change if driving conditions change. For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this mode may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset. If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW will display followed by the LOW FUEL message. See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. 3-47 Average Fuel Economy Press the information button until AVG ECONOMY displays. This mode shows the approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button. The display will return to zero. Instantaneous Fuel Economy Press the information button until INST ECONOMY displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and will change frequently as driving conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset. Battery Press the information button until BATTERY displays. This mode shows the current battery voltage. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. 3-48 Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This is normal. Oil Life Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays. This mode shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99% on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil life is low, the LOW OIL PRESSURE message will appear on the display. You should change your oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. The display will show 100% when the system is reset. Menu Button Items q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through the following items: Personalization (Uplevel Only) Press the menu button until PERSONAL PROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may have personalization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers. Press the menu button until UNITS displays. This mode allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this mode, press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC. Your vehicle may also have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for up to two drivers. See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 for additional information on personal programming. Language Compass Zone (Uplevel Only) Press the menu button until the language screen displays. This mode allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Once in this mode, press the set/reset button to select among the following choices: Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE displays. Press the set/reset button to change the compass zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available. The direction the vehicle is moving will be displayed in the top right corner of the DIC display. Units • English • Francais (French) • Espanol (Spanish) 3-49 Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only) The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually set the compass. However, under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance and reset the zone through the DIC. Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass in the vehicle could give false readings. In order to do this, the compass must be set or calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle is travelling. To adjust for compass variance, use the following procedure: 1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE displays. 2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance zone number on the map. 3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. 4. Press the menu button to advance to the COMPASS CALIBRATION screen. 3-50 5. To start the compass calibration, press and hold the set/reset button until CALIBRATION BEGUN DRIVE UNTIL DONE appears in the DIC display. 6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two times to activate the compass. When the calibration is complete, the DIC will display CALIBRATION FINISHED. DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another. Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge that you received the message and clear it from the DIC display. Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. If there are any active warning messages when the vehicle is turned off, two chimes will sound and the DIC will go into a reminder mode. The reminder mode displays any active message. If there are multiple messages, the DIC will display each message for five seconds. After each active message is displayed once, the reminder mode will turn off. You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them. A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION This message will display when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-39. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle. This message will come on while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this warning message and to clear it from the screen. 3-51 This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to your engine. ALL WHEEL DRIVE DISABLED If your vehicle has the all-wheel drive system, this message will display when there is a spare tire on the vehicle, or when the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, or when the rear differential fluid is overheating. This message will turn off when the differential fluid cools. The all-wheel drive system will be disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message is still on after putting on the full-size tire, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the message stays on, see your GM dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-12 for more information. 3-52 BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message will display when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge. The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor the battery voltage by pressing the information button until BATTERY displays. CHANGE OIL SOON This message will display when service is required for the vehicle. See your GM dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen under the gages menu on the DIC must also be reset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE This message will display when there is a problem with the generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer immediately. This message will display and a chime will sound while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. CHECK GAS CAP This message will display if the gas cap is not on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to ensure that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8 for more information. This message will display and a chime will sound while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-53 DELAYED LOCKING This message will display to inform the driver that even though a door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter has been pressed, that actual locking of the doors is being delayed because the delayed locking feature has been activated in the DIC. See “DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 for more information. This message will appear and a chime will sound when the ignition is off. This message cannot be acknowledged. DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR This message will display when the driver’s door is not closed properly. When this message appears, you should make sure that the driver’s door is closed completely. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. 3-54 This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR This message will display when the driver’s side rear door is not closed properly. When this message appears, you should make sure that the driver’s side rear door is closed completely. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. DRIVER SLIDING DOOR IN MOTION This message will display while the driver’s side power sliding door, if equipped, is opening or closing. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for more information. ENGINE COOLANT HOT Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on page 5-24 for more information. This message will display when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature warning light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-39 for more information. To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the air conditioner if it is on. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioner can be turned back on. This message will display only when the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this message is displayed. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED This message will display when the amount of available light outside of the vehicle is low, or the windshield wipers have been on for approximately 30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control is off or in the park lamps position. This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-14 for more information. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. 3-55 This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. HOOD AJAR If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this message will display when the hood is not closed properly. When this message appears, you should make sure that the hood is closed completely. See Hood Release on page 5-11. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. KEY FOB BATTERY LOW This message will display when the battery in the remote keyless entry transmitter needs to be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. KEY IN IGNITION If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. This message cannot be acknowledged. 3-56 This message will display and a chime will sound continuously when the driver’s door is open and the key is in the ignition and in the accessory or off position. This message will disappear and the chiming will stop when the key is removed from the ignition. LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT This message will display when the left front turn signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps on page 5-43. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT This message will display when the left rear turn signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-45. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. LIFT GATE AJAR This message will display when the liftgate is not closed completely. You should make sure that the liftgate is closed completely. See Liftgate on page 2-22. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-57 LOW BRAKE FLUID LOW FUEL This message will display when the brake fluid level is low. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the brake master cylinder reservoir. Also, see Brakes on page 5-33 for proper fluid level. This message will display when your vehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage on page 3-44 and Filling the Tank on page 5-8 for more information. The brake system warning light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37. This message will display and a chime will sound only while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-58 The message will display and a chime will sound while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. LOW OIL PRESSURE Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning message appears on the DIC display, stop the vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. Severe engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information. This message will display when the vehicle’s engine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-42. Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible when this message is displayed. This message will display only when the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this message is displayed. This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared from the screen. This message will re-display for a few seconds if the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. OBSTACLE DETECTED DRVR (Driver) SLIDING DOOR This message will display to alert the driver that an object is obstructing the driver’s side power sliding door, if equipped, while it is opening or closing. Remove any object that is obstructing the power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for more information. OBSTACLE DETECTED PASS (Passenger) SLIDING DOOR This message will display to alert the driver that an object is obstructing the passenger’s side power sliding door, if equipped, while it is opening or closing. Remove any object that is obstructing the power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for more information. PARKING BRAKE ON This message will display to alert the driver when the vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in RUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Release the parking brake before driving. See Parking Brake on page 2-37 for more information. The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37. A chime will sound continuously while this message is displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. 3-59 This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. PARK LAMPS ON PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR This message will display to alert the driver when the headlamps or parking lamps are on while the ignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-14 for more information. A chime will sound continuously while this message is displayed. This message will display when the passenger’s side rear door is not closed properly. When this message appears, you should make sure that the passenger’s side rear door is closed completely. This message cannot be acknowledged. PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR This message will display when the front passenger’s door is not closed properly. When this message appears, you should make sure that the front passenger’s door is closed completely. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. 3-60 This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOT FASTENED This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s seat belt. This message will display and a chime will sound when the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger airbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion. You should have the passenger buckle their seat belt. The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckled and the passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag is enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already buckled, this message and chime will not come on. PASSENGER SLIDING DOOR IN MOTION This message will display while the passenger’s side power sliding door, if equipped, is opening or closing. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for more information. REDUCED ENGINE POWER This message will display when the vehicle’s engine power is reduced. This happens when driving conditions, such as climbing a steep hill, make the transaxle overwork in a gear that may cause damage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. This message will display and a chime will sound only when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-61 REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE REMOTE START DISABLED This message will display when your vehicle is in an overheated engine operating mode. This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-26 for more information. Anytime this message is on, the vehicle should be taken to your GM dealer for service as soon as possible. This warning message will come on if a remote start attempt is unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the following conditions are true when a remote start attempt is made: This message will display and a chime will sound only when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. • The remote start system is disabled through the DIC. • • • • • • • The key is in the ignition. The hood or the doors are not closed. There is an emission control system malfunction. The engine coolant temperature is too high. The oil pressure is low. The hazard warning flashers are turned on. The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles has been reached. • The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while attempting to remote start the vehicle. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 3-68 and “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. 3-62 REMOTE START ON RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this message will display when a remote start is initiated. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. This message will display when the right rear turn signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-45. RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT This message will display when the right front turn signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps on page 5-43. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. SERVICE ABS SYSTEM If the vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), this message will display when the vehicle’s brakes are not functioning properly. Have the brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. The anti-lock brake system warning light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38. 3-63 This message will only display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message will display when a problem with the brake system has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. The brake system warning light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37. This message will only display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. SERVICE PARK LAMPS This message will display when there is a problem with the park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp fuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-87 and Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-88 for more information. If changing the fuse does not correct the problem, see your GM dealer. This message will only display while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-64 SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM ® If your vehicle has StabiliTrak , this message will display if there has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10. If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by your GM dealer as soon as possible. This message will display only while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM If your vehicle has the traction control system, this message will display when the system is not functioning properly. A warning light will also appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-39. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. Have the traction control system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. This message will display only while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. 3-65 SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message will display when a non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. This message will display only while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will display only while the ignition is in RUN. This message stays on until road conditions change and StabiliTrak® is not active. This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared from the screen. STABILITY CONTROL OFF This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will display any time the system turns off. When this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. This message will display only while the ignition is in RUN. STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE Any of the following conditions may cause the StabiliTrak® system to turn off: If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will display when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may exist when this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10. 3-66 • The battery is low. • There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See your GM dealer for service. STARTING DISABLED TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message will display if the starting of the engine is disabled due to the electronic throttle control system or vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately. If your vehicle has the traction control system, this message will display when the traction control system turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. This message will only appear while the ignition is in RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is resolved. This message will only display while the ignition is in RUN and will disappear after two seconds. This message cannot be acknowledged. Any of the following conditions may cause the traction control system to turn off: TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE • The traction control system is turned off by pressing If your vehicle has the traction control system, this message will display when the system is on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. • The battery is low. • There is a traction control system failure. See your This message only displays while the ignition is in RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions change and the traction control is no longer active. This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared from the screen. the traction control button located on the center of the instrument panel. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. GM dealer for service. TRANSMISSION FLUID HOT This message will display when the transaxle fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle until it cools down. If the warning message continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. 3-67 This message will display and a chime will sound only while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the screen. This message will continue to display for two seconds if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the message has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the engine is turned off. If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear when the engine is turned on. TURN SIGNAL ON This message will display as a reminder to turn off the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. This message displays and a chime sounds only when the ignition is in RUN. This message will clear from the screen if the turn signal is manually turned off, a turn is completed, or the message is acknowledged. 3-68 DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. The customization features include the following: • • • • • • • Exterior lighting delay Interior lighting delay Delayed locking Content theft Remote keyless entry feedback Remote start Rear park chime Your vehicle may also have personalization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers. The first personalized key corresponds to driver 1 and the second personalized key corresponds to driver 2. The personalization features include the following: • • • • Radio station presets Auto door lock preferences Auto door unlock preferences Remote keyless entry unlock preferences All of the customization and personalization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on your DIC. The default settings for the customization and personalization features were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default setting since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. Entering the Personal Program Menu 1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK (P). 2. Press the menu button until PERSONAL PROGRAM displays. If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONAL PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display. If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM NOT AVAILABLE will display. 3. Press the set/reset button to begin. 4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen. Press the menu button to display the modes that are available to program. Press the set/reset button to change the setting of each mode. The driver’s personalization preferences are recalled by using the key programmed for driver 1 or 2. To change customization and personalization preferences, use the following procedure. 3-69 Customization Menu Items ALL KEYS RESET The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle: This screen will only display if YES was selected on the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen. FACTORY DEFAULTS Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: This feature allows you to set all of the customization and personalization features back to their factory default settings. Press the menu button until FACTORY DEFAULTS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to their factory default settings and the DIC will return to the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen. OK: The features will be set to their factory default settings, the DIC will exit the personal program menu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will display. NO (default): The customization and personalization features will not be set to their factory default settings. EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY YES: The customization and personalization features will be set to their factory default settings. This feature allows you to set the amount of time the exterior lamps remain on after the key is removed from the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter. If YES is selected, the keys will need to be personalized again to be recognized as key 1 or 2. See “PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this section for more information. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAY appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for 15 seconds. 30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 3-70 60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for 60 seconds. DELAYED LOCKING 90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for 90 seconds. This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be delayed until all of the doors have been closed for approximately five seconds. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it may be activated when the key is out of the ignition by doing one of the following: INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED This feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition. Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not cause the interior lamps to turn on. ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition will cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about 25 seconds. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. • Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch one time while the driver’s door is open. • Pressing the passenger’s door power lock switch one time while the passenger’s door is open. • Pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter one time while any door is open. Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is active. The doors may be locked immediately by repeating one of the above actions more than one time. If a door remains open, without any other door being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after approximately 45 seconds. 3-71 If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock the doors. See Delayed Locking on page 2-12 for more information. Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFT appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be turned off. OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s doors. ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system will be turned on. ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed by five seconds while a door is open after a power door lock switch is pressed, or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while a door is open. When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system will be armed when the vehicle is locked by pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the power door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26 and Power Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. CONTENT THEFT FOB LOCK FEEDBACK If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system, once this feature is turned on, the system will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or the correct key. It will also activate when an incorrect key is used in the ignition. This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter. 3-72 Press the menu button until FOB LOCK FEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: Press the menu button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the vehicle. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. REMOTE START If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows the remote start to be turned OFF or ON. The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled. REAR PARK CHIME If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this feature allows the URPA system’s chime to be turned OFF or ON. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3-20 for more information. Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled. ON (default): The URPA system’s chime will be enabled. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. 3-73 Personalization Menu Items REPLACE KEY The following are personalization features that allow you to program setting for up to two drivers: This screen displays only if YES was selected for the PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2 have already been personalized, and the current key being used is not key 1 or 2. This feature allows you to program a key to be recognized as key 1 or 2 in the event that the previously programmed key needs to be replaced. PERSONALIZE KEY If you are using a key that has already been personalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2, this screen will not display. This feature allows you to personalize a key to be recognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you to program personalization features to a preferred setting to correspond to key 1 or 2. Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEY appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: NO (default): The key will not be personalized. YES: The key will be personalized. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. 3-74 1: The key will be programmed to be recognized as key 1. 2: The key will be programmed to be recognized as key 2. CANCEL (default): The key will not be programmed. RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED This screen displays only if YES was selected for the PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature allows you to set the radio station presets to be recognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is being used. Once this message displays, set the radio station presets. If the presets are not set at this time, the presets will not be recognized for key 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio station presets will be maintained. AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows automatic door locking to be turned OFF or ON. Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of the ignition. OFF: All automatic door locking is disabled. The doors will always need to be locked manually before driving, to increase occupant safety. DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of the ignition. ON (default): The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the doors are closed and the vehicle is shifted into DRIVE (D). ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of the ignition. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK AUTO UNLOCK ON This feature displays only if ON was selected for the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature. This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for all of the doors. This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature. This feature allows the selection of when the vehicle’s doors will unlock. 3-75 Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ON appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. The DIC will then display PRESS UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter and your setting will be saved for that remote keyless entry transmitter. PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). Choose one of the available settings and press the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS This feature allows the selection of which doors will unlock on the first press of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following choices: DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. 3-76 After programming the last option, the message KEY FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appear on the DIC display for a few seconds if you personalized the key. Next, the message PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will appear briefly on the DIC display, then the display will return to the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen. Exiting the Personal Program Menu The personal program menu will be exited when any of the following occurs: • The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). • The vehicle is no longer in RUN. • The end of the personal program menu is reached. Audio System(s) Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it is very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find out what your audio system can do, and how to operate all of its controls. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-31 for more information. Setting the Time Press the H or the M button to enter clock mode. Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold M until the correct minute appears on the display. Radio with CD Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar Your vehicle has seven Bose® amplified speakers. See your GM dealer for details. Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. 3-77 With RDS, the radio can do the following: • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations • Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Playing the Radio Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume. 4 (Information): For RDS, press this button to change what appears on the display while using RDS. The display options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the program (if available). While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS stations may also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and the name of the program being broadcast. For XM™ (if equipped), press the information button while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. XM™ Satellite Radio Service To change the default on the display, press the information button until you see the display you want, then hold the button for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default. If your vehicle has XM™, XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. 3-78 AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive, by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. To turn AudioPilot® off, press the automatic volume button until AVOL OFF appears on the display. For additional information on AudioPilot®, please visit www.bose.com. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select AUTO VOLUME MIN, AUTO VOLUME MED, or AUTO VOLUME MAX. Each higher setting will provide more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFF appears on the display. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press this button again to turn the sound on. ® If your vehicle has the Bose audio system, it includes Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio system to compensate for background noise, so that your music always sounds the same at the set volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well you hear the music being played through your vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings, where the music is much louder than the background noise, there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®. To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to your desired level. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressing the automatic volume button until AVOL ON appears on the display. As you increase vehicle speed, the background noise in your vehicle will increase. AudioPilot® will adjust your audio system’s output for the background noise it hears. This button is not available on the Radio with Six-Disc CD. Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will show the selection. O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations. t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow for two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. 3-79 To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to the next preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press either scan arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets. Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle position, press and hold this knob when the tone control is on the display. The level will change to the middle position. Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob to select BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold this knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED will appear on the display. 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will return and the equalization that was selected will be stored for that pushbutton. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 3-80 AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button to select customized equalization settings designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings. The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source. If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system, the equalization settings are EQ1 through EQ7 and CUSTOM. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, press this knob until BALANCE appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, press this knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position, press and hold this knob when the speaker control is on the display. The level will change to the middle position. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold this knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED will appear on the display. Finding a Category Station (RDS and XM™) To select and find a desired category perform the following: 1. Press the CAT button. The last selected category will appear on the display. 2. Turn the tune knob to select the category. 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow to take you to a category’s station. SEEKING CATEGORY will appear on the display. 4. To go to another station within that category, press the CAT button to display the category, then press either SEEK arrow to go to another station. If both category and traffic are on, the radio will search for stations with the selected category and traffic announcements. If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to. 3-81 SCAN: Scan the stations within a category by performing the following: 1. Press the CAT button. The last selected category will appear on the display. 2. Turn the tune knob to select the category. 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and hold either SCAN arrow until you hear a beep and SCAN CATEGORY appears on the display. The radio will begin scanning the stations in the category. 4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning. If both category and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for stations with the selected category and traffic announcements. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same category. To turn alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations with a stronger frequency. 3-82 To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations. This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio Service. RDS Messages ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be turned off. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations. 4 (Information): If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the message will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message, press and release this button. A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of the button. Once the complete message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The last message can be displayed by pressing this button. You can view the last message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to. When a message is not available from a station, NO INFO will appear on the display. If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements, press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the display. If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn off the traffic announcements. The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio Service. TRAF (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it. 3-83 Radio Messages CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer for service. LOCKED: This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle to your GM dealer for service. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem. XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 second delay) The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly. 3-84 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel. CH Unavail Channel no longer available This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button. No Info Artist Name/Feature not available No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info Song/Program Title not available No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your GM dealer. 3-85 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Unknown Radio ID not known (should only be if hardware failure) If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer. Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer. Playing a CD (Single CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display. 3-86 The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in the CD player. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next or previous track. { (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse the current track. | (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to fast forward through the current track. RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM DISC will appear on the display. Press this button again to turn off random play. RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track over again. REPEAT will appear on the display. Press this button again to turn off repeat play. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press this button again to turn the sound on. t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display when a CD is in the player. If the system has a remote playback device, pressing this button a second time will allow the remote device to play. AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played. For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section. X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. 3-87 Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in the CD player. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs. 3-88 To insert one CD, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and release the load button. 3. When INSET CD # appears on the display, load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in. To insert multiple CDs, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and hold the load button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and LOAD ALL DISC will appear on the display. 3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display, load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in. Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD # to appear on the display, then load the next CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six. To load more than one CD but less than six, complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, press the load button to cancel the loading function. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for each CD will appear on the display. Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the display. To play a specific CD press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD. Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject a CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next or previous track. X (Eject): { (Reverse): Press this button to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and release this button. To eject multiple CDs, do the following: 1. Press and hold the eject button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and EJECT ALL DISCS will appear on the display. 2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display, the CD will eject and can be removed. To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load or the eject button. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time period is complete, the player will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several times before stopping. Press and hold this button to reverse within the current track. | (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to fast forward through the current track. RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or all of the loaded CDs. To use random, do one of the following: • To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in random order, press and release this button until RANDOM DISC PLAY appears on the display. • To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in random order, press and release this button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appears on the display. To turn off random play, press and release the RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the display 3-89 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track or an entire CD over again. To use repeat, do one of the following: • To repeat a track, press and release this button until REPEAT appears on the display. • To repeat an entire CD, press and release this button until REPEAT ONE DISC appears on the display. To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on the display t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. 3-90 To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display when a CD is in the player. If your system is equipped with a remote playback device, pressing this button a second time will allow the remote device to play. AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played. For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section. Using an MP3 CD Root Directory MP3 Format The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under the root directory will be accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always be accessed before root folders or files. This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs, 40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album will be available when recorded using ID3 tags versions 1 and 2. The player will be able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists may cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum will be ignored. Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player will advance to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files and the empty folder will not be displayed or numbered. No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will be located under the root folder. The next and previous folder functions will have no function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT. 3-91 When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT. Order of Play Tracks will be played in the following order: • Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist and will continue sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has been played, play will continue from the first track of the first playlist. • If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play will begin from the first track under the root directory. When all tracks from the root directory have been played, play will continue from files according to their numerical listing. After playing the last track from the last folder, play will begin again at the first track of the first folder or root directory. When play enters a new folder, the display will not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display. See the information button later in this section for more information. The new track name will appear on the display. 3-92 File System and Naming The song name that will be displayed will be the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages will be shortened. The display will not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename will not be displayed. Preprogrammed Playlists You can access preprogrammed playlists which were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing capability. These playlists will be treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playing an MP3 Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in, and READING will appear on the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol will appear on the display. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in the CD player. RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs. To use random, do one of the following: • To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in random order, press and release this button until RANDOM DISC appears on the display. • To play the tracks in the folder you are listening to in random order, press and release this button until RANDOM FOLDER appears on the display. • To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in random order, press and release this button until RANDOM ALL appears on the display. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. To turn off random play, press and release the RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the display O / e (Tune): RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track, CD, or a folder over again. Turn this knob to go to the next or previous track. { (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to the first track in the previous folder. Press and hold this button to reverse through the current track. | (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the first track in the next folder. Press and hold this button to fast forward the current track. To use repeat, do one of the following: • To repeat a track, press and release this button until REPEAT TRACK appears on the display. • To repeat a CD, press and release this button until REPEAT DISC appears on the display. • To repeat a folder, press and release this button until REPEAT FOLDER appears on the display. 3-93 To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on the display Using R (Song List) Mode (Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD) MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press this button again to turn the sound on. This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections. To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the following steps: This button is not available on the Radio with Six-Disc CD. t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. 1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one CD. 2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song list mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If S-LIST is present, press the song list button to turn it off. 4 (Information): 3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK right arrow or turn the tune knob to locate the track to be saved. The track will begin to play. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. 4. Press and hold the song list button to save the track into memory. When song list is pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. ADDED SONG will appear on the display. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is loaded. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. Press this button to display the artist name and album contained in the ID3 tag. Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. 3-94 SONGLIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save more than 20 selections. To play the song list, press the song list button. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order they were saved. Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to the first saved track. To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following steps: 1. Turn the CD player on. 2. Press the song list button to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display. 3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tune knob to select the desired track to be deleted. 4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds. Release the button when SONG REMOVED appears on the display. After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are moved up the list. When another track is added to the song list, the track will be added to the end of the list. To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps: 1. Turn the CD player on. 2. Press the song list button to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display. 3. Press and hold the song list button for more than four seconds. One beep will be heard. SONGLIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the song list has been deleted. If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list. To end song list mode, press the song list button. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from the display. CD Messages CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. 3-95 If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem. Navigation/Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio Service capabilities (if equipped). The radio can also communicate with the navigation system to broadcast announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency alert communications. For information on how to use this system, see the “Navigation System” manual. Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote control. Parental Control rj (Parental Control): This button is located behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks. Press this button while using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen and to mute the audio. The power indicator lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the parental control will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD player, and remote control. This button may also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If no disc is in the player, the system will power up in auxiliary mode. Before You Drive The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so. The RSE system will play DVD, CD, and MP3 discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device to the RSE system to play games, watch videos, look at pictures, etc. Normal operation may be limited under extremely low or high temperatures, in order to protect the system from damage. Operate the RSE system under normal or comfortable cabin temperature ranges. 3-96 Headphones Wireless Headphones The RSE system may include two sets of wireless headphones. The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch, a channel select switch, and a volume control. To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An indicator light on the headphones will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use. The headphones will shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system is shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. The transmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate. If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal. DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless headphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or CH2 of the wireless headphones. Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. If there is a decreased audio signal during CD, MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissing noise through the speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in the wireless headphones seems excessive, make sure that the headphone batteries are fully charged. Some amount of hissing is normal. Battery Replacement To change the batteries, do the following: 1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door located on the left side of the headphone earpiece. 2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Tighten the screw on the battery compartment door. If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool, dry place. To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones, use the volume control. 3-97 Wired Headphones Stereo RCA Jacks There is a right and left wired headphone jack. To adjust the volume, do the following: 1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding jack, located behind the video screen, next to the auxiliary jacks. 2. Press the corresponding headphone button on the DVD faceplate. 3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on the DVD faceplate, to increase or to decrease the volume. The wired headphones work as follows: • DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will play RSE audio. • DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will play RSA audio. • DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will play RSA audio. 3-98 The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is used for video inputs, the red RCA jack for right audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left audio inputs. The system requires standard RCA cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage. To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect an external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power and the power on the front of the RSE player. If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned on, the player will automatically begin playing the disc and the user will need to press the AUX button on the remote control or on the DVD player faceplate to switch the system between the DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section for more information. Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices can be heard through the following possible sources: • Vehicle Speakers • Wireless Headphones • Wired Headphones (not included) Vehicle Speakers Only one audio source can be heard through the vehicle’s speakers at a time. The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be heard through all of the vehicle’s speakers when the following occurs: • A DVD or auxiliary device is playing • The front audio system is on and the CD AUX button is pressed to enable the RSE system DVD will appear on the radio display when the RSE system is on. To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press the CD AUX button on the radio. The audio from the RSE system can be heard through the wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers at the same time. The volume on the radio may vary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD, MP3, or an auxiliary device. Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push forward on the release button and the screen will fold down. 2. Adjust its position as desired. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its stowed and latched position. Notice: Directly touching the video screen may damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning the Video Screen” later in this section for more information. 3-99 DVD Player DVD Player Buttons The DVD player is located in the overhead console. The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for more information. The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that the vehicle was sold. The DVD region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs. Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhanced CDs, video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3 media are supported by this DVD player. DVD+R, DVD+RW, and copy protected CDs may or may not be supported by the DVD player. The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD audio media. An error message will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted into the DVD player. If an error message appears on the video screen, see “DVD Messages” later in this section. cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding. Press this button twice to eject a disc. O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off. AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary device. 3-100 s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a disc. Press this button while a disc is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play of a disc. tr / [ u (Reverse/Fast Forward): These controls can be used to move forward or backward through a disc. These buttons can also be used to modify RSA, rear temperature, rear fan speed, and wired headphone volume adjustment. See “Headphones” earlier in this section, Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-110, and Rear Climate Control System on page 3-29 for more information. When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the RSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause buttons are the only buttons that will work. Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing at the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions. Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control. To resume playback, press the play/pause button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control. The movie should resume play from where it was last stopped if the disc has not been ejected. If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume play at the beginning of the disc. Playing a Disc Ejecting a Disc To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start if the vehicle is in ACCESSORY, ON, or RAP. If a disc is already in the player, make sure that the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause button on the player faceplate or on the remote control. You can also, press the CD AUX button on the radio faceplate, until RSE appears on the display, to start playing a disc. Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote control. If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of time. 3-101 Remote Control Remote Control Buttons To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter window next to the RSE faceplate and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the transmitter to receive signals from the remote control. If the remote control does not seem to be working, the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight will affect the function of the remote control. Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place. O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off. P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the remote control backlighting on. The backlight will automatically turn off after eight seconds. v (Title): Press this button to display the current title number. Each press of this button will move the disc to the next available title. 3-102 n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these buttons to move through DVD menus. The up and down arrows will move through MP3 folders. r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu. z (Display Control Button): Press this button to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display modes. y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the main DVD menu. The menu is different on every disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After making a selection, press the enter button. s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a disc. Press this button while a disc is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the disc. t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to the beginning of the current chapter or track. Press this button again to return to the previous chapter or track. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or previews. u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse the disc. To stop reversing, press the play or stop button. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. q (Return): Press this button to go back one step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVD menus. Press this button to exit the current menu and to move to the previous menu. [ (Fast Forward): c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc. e (Sound): Press this button to fast forward the disc. To stop fast forwarding, press the play or stop button. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. Press this button to display the current audio track. Each press will move the DVD to the next language or commentary. The format and content of this function will vary for each disc. 3-103 { (Subtitles): Press this button to display the current subtitles. Each press of this button will move the DVD to the next available subtitle option (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available). The format and content of this function will vary for each disc. AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source. | (Camera): Press this button to display the current camera angle on DVDs that have this feature. Each press will move the DVD to the next available camera angle. The format and content of this function will vary for each disc. 0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection. \ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs. } 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than 9. Press this button before inputting the number. 3-104 RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or an auxiliary device, do the following: To access this menu, press the display button on the remote control. Once the menu is on the screen, use the directional arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen. This menu will let you select default preferences for video format, language preference, brightness, color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the setup menus. If a feature is not supported, the defaults will be provided by the DVD media. To exit this menu, press the display or the return button on the remote control or wait for the menu to time out. To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or an MP3, do the following: Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the RSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary, then press the display button on the remote control. Once the menu is on the screen, use the directional arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen. This menu will let you select default preferences for language and playback settings. To exit this menu, press the display or the return button on the remote control or wait for the menu to time out. Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries, do the following: Tips and Troubleshooting Chart Problem Recommended Action 1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of the remote control, down. No power. 2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. The ignition may not be in ACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP. Disc will not play. The system might be off. The parental control button might have been pressed. The power indicator lights will flash. The system might be in auxiliary source mode. Press the AUX button to switch between the DVD player and the auxiliary source. The disc is upside down or is not compatible. No sound — Wireless Headphones Turn the headphones on. Make sure the correct channel is selected on the wireless headphones. Check the batteries. The volume on the headphones could be too low, adjust the volume. 3. Close the battery door. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. 3-105 Problem Recommended Action No sound — Wired Headphones Make sure the wired headphones are plugged in. Adjust the volume. If RSA is on, DVD audio will not be heard. No sound — Vehicle Speakers If the DVD system is being heard through the vehicle speakers, adjust the volume on the radio. Press the CD AUX button on the radio to make sure that RSE is enabled. The rear speakers will mute when RSA is on. The picture is distorted during fast forward or reverse. This is normal for this operation. The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out. Video mode may not be correctly set. See “RSE OSD” earlier in this section. 3-106 Problem Recommended Action I ejected the disc and tried to take it out, but it was pulled back into the slot. Press the eject button once. The language in the audio or on the screen is wrong. Press the main menu button on the remote control and change the audio or language selection on the DVD menu. To change the language preference, press the display button to access the RSE OSD menu. See “RSE OSD” earlier in this section. The remote control does not work. Point the remote control directly at the face of the DVD unit. The batteries could be weak or put in wrong. The parental control button might have been pressed, the power indicator lights will flash. Problem Recommended Action How do I get subtitles on or off? Press the subtitle button on the remote control to select subtitle option or go to the DVDs main menu and follow the screen prompts. The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound. Press and release the AUX button on the remote control or the DVD player to get to auxiliary input. Check to make sure that the auxiliary source is connected to the inputs properly. The audio or video skips or jumps. The DVD could be dirty or scratched. Try cleaning the disc. Problem Recommended Action The fast forward, reverse, previous, and next functions do not work. Some commands that do one thing for DVDs will not always work or perform the same function for audio, CDs, or games. These functions may also be disabled when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. When RSA is on, these buttons control RSA functions. My disc is stuck in the player. The eject button does not work. Press the eject button on the DVD player. Turn the ignition off, then on again, then press the eject button on the DVD player. Do not attempt to force or remove the disc from the player. If the problem persists, return to your GM dealer for further assistance. 3-107 Problem Recommended Action I lost the remote control and/or the headphones. Contact your GM dealer for assistance. Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes for a moment, then it comes back. This could be caused by interference from cell towers or by using the cellular telephone or other radio transmitter devices in the vehicle. DVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme temperatures the DVD system might not be operable. Temperatures below −4°F (−20°C) or above 140°F (60°C) could damage the DVD system. Operate the DVD system under normal or comfortable cabin temperature ranges. See your GM dealer if the problem persists. 3-108 Problem Recommended Action The wireless headphones have audio distortion. Verify that the headphones are facing to the front of the vehicle, left and right sides are indicated on the headphones to ensure that the signal is received properly. Verify that there is no obstruction between the headphone(s) and the transmitter. Verify that the batteries have a full charge. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the signal coming from the auxiliary device and make sure that the connection and the signal is good. DVD Messages DVD Distortion The following errors may be displayed on the video screen. There may be an experience with video distortion when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies. Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable, or if the disc format is not compatible. It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched or damaged discs will cause this error. *Excludes the OnStar® System. Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the region code of the DVD player. When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected. No Disc: This message will be displayed when you try to play or eject a disc that is not in the player. Cleaning the DVD Player Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result. X: A white X will be displayed, in the upper left corner of the video screen, if the operation that has been selected is not currently available. 3-109 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) If your vehicle has rear seat audio (RSA), this feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers can only control the sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to and control a CD through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. The front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will not be able to control the remote source. You can operate the RSA when the main radio is off. The DVD or auxiliary device will always be available on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless headphones. All other RSA sources are available on CHB or CH2 of the wireless and wired headphones. If the RSA is off, the wired headphones will provide DVD or auxiliary device audio. You will not be able to listen to XM, on CHB or CH2, if you are listening to a DVD or an auxiliary device on CHB or CH2 and vice versa. The remote control will not operate any of the RSA features. 3-110 O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 will appear on the display when the system is on to indicate the channel to receive audio for the wireless headphones. Press this button when the system is on to silence the rear speakers. Press this button again to turn the sound back on. BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selected radio station will appear on the display. If the front passengers are listening to the radio, the RSA will not switch between the bands and cannot change the station. tr / [ u (Tune): When listening to the radio, press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or the previous station and stay there. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped). If one of the sources are not loaded, the system will skip over the source when this button is pressed. When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track or to the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD. X (Headphone): Press the right or the left headphone button to enable volume control of the wired headphone connected to the corresponding jack. Press the right and left arrow buttons to change the volume. When a CD is playing in the single CD player, press this button to select the next track. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD. rj (Parental Control): This button is located behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks. Press this button while using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen and to mute the audio. The power indicator lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the parental control will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD player, and remote control. When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD. This button may also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If no disc is in the player then the system will power up in auxiliary mode. PROG (Program): Press this button to select the next preset station stored on the radio. Each press of this button will take you to the next preset station. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. 3-111 Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display. With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate if stolen. Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following: wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there. To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go to the next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while seeking or scanning. The radio will only seek or scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the previous or next track, if more than eight seconds have played. If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). 3-112 1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio will go to the next preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press this button again to stop scanning. The radio will only scan preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. $ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system. Press this button again, to turn the sound on. FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. XM™ Satellite Radio Service r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this button to play a cassette tape or CD. XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference. wu x (Volume): Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the volume. Care of Your CDs and DVDs Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can occur on AM stations caused by things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise. Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. 3-113 Care of Your CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it. Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand. 3-114 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed. Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Drunken Driving .............................................4-3 Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6 Braking .........................................................4-6 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7 Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8 Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9 StabiliTrak® System ......................................4-10 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-12 Steering ......................................................4-12 Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14 Passing .......................................................4-15 Loss of Control .............................................4-16 Driving at Night ............................................4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-19 City Driving ..................................................4-22 Freeway Driving ...........................................4-23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-24 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-25 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-25 Winter Driving ..............................................4-27 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ..............................................4-31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-32 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32 Towing ..........................................................4-37 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-37 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-37 Level Control ...............................................4-39 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-16. Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. 4-2 Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: • • • • Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. 4-3 The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: • The amount of alcohol consumed • The drinker’s body weight • The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking • The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks. 4-4 The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. {CAUTION: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. 4-5 Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. 4-6 And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38. Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel. 4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. 4-8 Traction Control System (TCS) Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the system operates if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an all-wheel-drive vehicle, the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will come on in the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. This warning light will come on to let you know if there is a problem with your traction control system. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message in the DIC comes on and stays on or comes on while you are driving, there’s a problem with your traction control system. Have the traction control system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. When this warning message is on, the TRACTION CONTROL OFF message in the DIC will come on to remind you that the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. 4-9 The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-32 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-31. To turn the system off, press the traction control button located on the center of the instrument panel. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will go off, but the system will not turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will come on to remind you the system is off. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The traction control system warning message should go off. 4-10 StabiliTrak® System Your vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak® which combines anti-lock brake, traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions. When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system working. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle. If the system fails to turn on or activate, the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). If the vehicle has gone through heavy acceleration or braking or multiple turns during the first two miles of driving after starting your vehicle, the STABILITY CONTROL OFF message may appear on the DIC. If this is the case, your vehicle does not need servicing. You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restart it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either message appears on the DIC, and your vehicle has not gone through hard acceleration, braking or multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your vehicle should be taken in for service. The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message will appear on the DIC only when the system is both on and activated. It means that an advanced computer-controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you are steering. StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the system activates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message is on, you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit. For more information on the stability messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45. If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the traction control system warning light will illuminate, and the STABILITY CONTROL OFF message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave traction control on, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-32 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-31. Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary. The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle. It will activate and display the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message in the DIC if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving an all-wheel-drive vehicle, or if one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving a front-wheel-drive vehicle. If the brake traction-control system activates constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will be displayed. In the limited mode, the traction control system will only use engine traction-control and is limited in its ability to provide optimal performance since the system will not utilize brake traction-control to control slip on the drive wheels. The system will return to normal operation after the brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage. 4-11 The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration. This is normal. During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may be reduced to protect AWD system components. If the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage, the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the system from overheating. When the system cools down, the AWD system will activate itself again automatically; this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending on outside temperature and vehicle use. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message will appear on the DIC and the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 3-10. Steering StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer for service. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Power Steering Steering Tips All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Driving on Curves If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD system operates automatically without any action required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive the vehicle as required. There may be a slight engagement noise during hard use but this is normal. It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. 4-12 A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here is why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control systems — steering and braking — have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Steering in Emergencies The same thing can happen if you are steering through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two control systems — steering and acceleration — can overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road and make you lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. 4-13 Off-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-14 If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: • Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. 4-15 • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is. • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. • If you are being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. 4-16 Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. If you do not have this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. If you have the anti-lock braking system (ABS), remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control. 4-17 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. • In remote areas, watch for animals. • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-18 No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are not even aware of it. Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 4-19 The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you hit them. 4-20 {CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Driving Through Flowing Water {CAUTION: Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips • Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your • • parking lamps — to help make you more visible to others. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-47. 4-21 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: • Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You will save time and energy. See Freeway Driving on page 4-23. • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-22 Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot. 4-23 Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They will be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are some things you can check before a trip: The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. Are all windows clean inside and outside? all levels? • Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? • Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? • Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? • Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? 4-24 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-25 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. {CAUTION: • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid • Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. {CAUTION: If you do not shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. • Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to • • • 4-26 a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be very careful. Here are some tips for winter driving: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Also see Tires on page 5-47. 4-27 Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution. If you have the traction control system (TCS), it will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you ever need to. You should turn the TCS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-31. Even though your vehicle has TCS, you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. 4-28 If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Unless you have the anti-lock braking system (ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-7. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction you can. Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer. • Whatever your braking system, allow greater following distance on any slippery road. • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: • Turn on your hazard flashers. • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow. • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. 4-29 {CAUTION: Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. 4-30 Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck, but you must use caution. {CAUTION: If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-32. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-60. 4-31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-37. It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. 4-32 {CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-47 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53. There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Example Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4-33 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. Example 1 Item A B C 4-34 Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) 700 lbs (317 kg) Example 2 Item A B C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Example 3 Total Item 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A 750 lbs (340 kg) B 250 lbs (113 kg) C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. 4-35 Certification/Tire Label The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. {CAUTION: A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. 4-36 If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. {CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5. If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device know as a “dolly”). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. 4-37 Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. • Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. • Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-24. Dinghy Towing Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed with the two rear wheels on the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier equipment. 4-38 Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground. Dolly Towing If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed with its two rear wheels on the ground. To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following: 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P). 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. 5. Release the parking brake. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier equipment. Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground. Level Control With this feature, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. You may hear the compressor operating when you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system self-adjusts. This is normal. The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues for an extended period of time, your vehicle needs service. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. Towing a Trailer {CAUTION: If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the instructions in this section and check with your dealer for more information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. 4-39 Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That is the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here are some important points: • There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in this section. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle, or other parts could be damaged. • During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. • You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a lower gear when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle. Three important considerations have to do with weight: • Weight of the trailer • Weight of the trailer tongue • Weight on your vehicle’s tires 4-40 Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle. Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Two-Wheel-Drive (Short Wheel Base) 3.29 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) Two-Wheel-Drive (Long Wheel Base) 3.29 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) All-Wheel Drive 3.29 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) Vehicle *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded. You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can contact the Customer Assistance Center. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4 for more information. In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Center, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 4-41 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32 for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. If you are using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight (350 lbs (159 kg)), for your vehicle. After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. 4-42 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. • Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, remember to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-40. Dirt and water can, too. Hitches Safety Chains It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. • The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. • If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted weight-carrying hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you are driving. 4-43 Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install, adjust, and maintain them properly. Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. 4-44 Driving with a Trailer {CAUTION: If you have a rear-most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-40. To maximize your safety when towing a trailer: • Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip. • Keep the rear-most windows closed. • If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle. Do not use the climate control setting for maximum air because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-25. Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Passing Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. Backing Up During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Making Turns Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. You will need more passing distance up ahead when you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. 4-45 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra wiring. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn, change lanes, or stop. When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle. 4-46 Parking on Hills {CAUTION: You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do the following: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into PARK (P). 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and shift into PARK (P). 5. Release the regular brakes. When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you do the following: • Start your engine. • Shift into a gear. • Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system, and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle has a trailer wiring harness located at the rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring harness, you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer for more information. 4-47 ✍ NOTES 4-48 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Service ............................................................5-3 Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-5 Fuel ................................................................5-5 Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5 California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Additives .......................................................5-6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7 Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Engine Oil ...................................................5-13 Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17 Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-19 Engine Coolant .............................................5-21 Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-23 Engine Overheating .......................................5-24 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ........................................5-26 Cooling System ............................................5-26 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-32 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32 Brakes ........................................................5-33 Battery ........................................................5-36 Jump Starting ...............................................5-36 All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-41 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-42 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-43 Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .................5-43 Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................................5-44 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .........................................5-45 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-46 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-46 Tires ..............................................................5-47 Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-48 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-50 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-53 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55 Buying New Tires .........................................5-56 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-57 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-58 5-1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Wheel Replacement ......................................5-58 Tire Chains ..................................................5-60 Accessory Inflator .........................................5-60 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-62 Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-64 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ..........................................5-67 Secondary Latch System ...............................5-72 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-74 Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-77 Appearance Care ............................................5-77 Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-78 Vinyl ...........................................................5-79 Leather .......................................................5-80 Instrument Panel ..........................................5-80 Interior Plastic Components ............................5-80 Glass Surfaces .............................................5-80 Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-80 Weatherstrips ...............................................5-81 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-81 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-81 5-2 Finish Care ..................................................5-81 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-82 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................5-82 Tires ...........................................................5-83 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-83 Finish Damage .............................................5-83 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-84 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-84 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-84 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-85 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-85 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-86 Electrical System ............................................5-86 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-86 Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-86 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-87 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-87 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-87 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-88 Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-90 Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-93 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. 5-3 Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work, you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14. 5-4 {CAUTION: You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Gasoline Octane A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline. Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. 5-5 California Fuel Additives If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. 5-6 Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving. 5-7 Filling the Tank {CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only open partway. 5-8 While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether. {CAUTION: If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-81. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right (clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40. The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. {CAUTION: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40. 5-9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood {CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. 5-10 {CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. {CAUTION: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release To open the hood, do the following: 1. Pull the hood release handle with this symbol on it. It is located under the instrument panel on the driver’s side. 4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from its storage clip. The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine temperatures under the hood, so be careful when handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when handling the hood prop. 5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the underside of the hood, on the driver’s side of the vehicle. It is marked by an arrow. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then let the hood down and close it firmly. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the underhood release to the right. It is located near the center of the hood, above the grille. 3. Lift the hood. 5-11 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood, here is what you will see: 5-12 A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-90. B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-36. C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32. D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap on page 5-23. E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-32. F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-13. G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-13. H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19. I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-33. J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on page 5-26. Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. 5-13 When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-93. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. 5-14 See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. Look for two things: • GM6094M Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. • SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. 5-15 If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Engine Oil Life System Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. When to Change Engine Oil How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. 5-16 1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off, repeatedly push the trip/reset button until OIL is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the trip/reset button for five seconds. The number will disappear and be replaced by 100 (indicating 100% oil life remaining). Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3. Turn the key to LOCK. If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center for help. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace at the first oil change after 50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. 5-17 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the following: 1. Remove the two clamps on the duct. 2. Remove the duct. {CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. 3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air cleaner/filter housing. 4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel with the slots at the bottom of the housing. 6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated correctly in the slots. 7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps. 5-18 Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: • In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. • In hilly or mountainous terrain. • When doing frequent trailer towing. • Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. How to Check Automatic Transaxle Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: • • • • When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). 5-19 Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to drive longer. 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again. Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows: • Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. • With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). • With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). • Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: The automatic transaxle dipstick is located toward the back of the engine compartment, next to the brake master cylinder reservoir. The dipstick handle is a red loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 5-20 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way. How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid Engine Coolant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill. Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check Automatic Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section. 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-24. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant will: • Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). • Protect against rust and corrosion. • Help keep the proper engine temperature. • Let the warning messages and gages work as they should. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. 5-21 What Engine Coolant to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do not need to add anything else. {CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. 5-22 Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Checking Coolant The coolant recovery tank is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, above the engine air cleaner/filter. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the full cold mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be above the full cold mark or a little higher. The full cold mark is a line with an arrow pointing down at it, located on the front of the coolant recovery tank. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. {CAUTION: Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a little — when the engine and radiator are hot. {CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see Cooling System on page 5-26. Radiator Pressure Cap Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 5-23 Engine Overheating You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-39. Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE COOLANT HOT message displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine {CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-24 Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: • • • • Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary. 3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving — AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or THIRD (3). If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 5-25 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. 5-26 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see: A. Radiator Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans C. Coolant Recovery Tank {CAUTION: CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service. The coolant level should be at or above the full cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. {CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. CAUTION: (Continued) (Continued) Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. 5-27 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for more information. Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the full cold mark, start your vehicle. {CAUTION: {CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. 5-28 You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. If the overheat warning continues, there is one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it. {CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. How to Add Coolant to the Radiator Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. Do not press down while turning the pressure cap. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-29 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. {CAUTION: 3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valves. There are two bleed valves. One is located on the thermostat housing. The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Housing 5-30 Bypass Tube 4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for more information about the proper coolant mixture. If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiator is filled. 5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment. 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up with the vent tube. 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans. 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the full cold mark. 10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank. 5-31 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H (hot) mark. When it is cold, the level should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid. What Power Steering Fluid to Use When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid, do the following: 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 5-32 To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid What Washer Fluid to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Notice: Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir. • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid. • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work at all. • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. 5-33 So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. {CAUTION: If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. 5-34 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. {CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice: • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance Care on page 5-77. Brake Wear Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. {CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. 5-35 Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system — for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. {CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. 5-36 Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a battery may cause the system to become inoperative. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16 for more information. {CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle. You will not need to access your battery for jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal for that purpose. 5-37 The terminal is located under a tethered cap at the front of the underhood fuse block. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. Squeeze the tabs and swing the cap out of the way to access the remote positive (+) terminal. You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery. {CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. 5-38 {CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. {CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 5-39 Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. 5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its original position. Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 5-40 All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. All-wheel-drive vehicles have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. 5-41 Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module) When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the differential, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired, if needed. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-46. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. 5-42 Halogen Bulbs To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11 for more information. {CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps 2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) by turning it towards the headlamp assembly and pulling it straight out. A. High-beam Headlamp B. Low-beam Headlamp C. Sidemarker Lamp 3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of the headlamp assembly. 5-43 4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle. 5. Disconnect the socket wiring harness connector from the headlamp assembly. Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from the assembly. 7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnect the bulb socket wiring harness and connect to the new bulb socket. To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the old bulb out and push a new bulb in. 8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the bulb assembly and turning it clockwise to secure. 9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp assembly. To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following: 1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove the headlamp assembly. See Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps on page 5-43 for more information. 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from the assembly. 3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket. 4. Replace with a new bulb. 5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the bulb assembly and turning it clockwise to secure. 6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp assembly. 5-44 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps To change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal or back-up lamp bulb, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-22 for more information. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing on the inboard side. A. Stoplamp/Taillamp B. Turn Signal Lamp C. Back-up Lamp Bulb 5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove. 3. Pull out the taillamp housing. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the taillamp assembly. 6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out of the socket and gently pushing in a new bulb. 7. Replace the bulb socket by inserting and turning clockwise to secure. 5-45 8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the outboard locating/retaining pins until the lamp is seated. 9. Secure with the inboard screws. To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following: Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Back-up Front Turn Signal, DRL and Parking High-Beam and Low-Beam Headlamps Sidemarker Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13. Bulb Number 3057K 1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing away from the windshield. 5702KA H11 194 3057K For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. 5-46 2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of the wiper blade assembly to remove the wiper arm (A) from the blade (C). Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield. 3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the tabs on each side of the wiper blade assembly click into place. To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps listed above. Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual. {CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53. • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. 5-47 Tire Sidewall Labelling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. 5-48 (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-57. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. (C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. (E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53. Compact Spare Tire Example (A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-77 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-62. (F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only. (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 5-49 Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size. (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (F) Service Description: These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. Tire Terminology and Definitions (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide. Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. 5-50 Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. 5-51 Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. 5-52 Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-57. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • • • • • • Premature or irregular wear For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. Poor handling When to Check Reduced fuel economy Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-77. Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • • • • A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 5-53 How to Check Tire Inspection and Rotation Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacement on page 5-58 for more information. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. 5-54 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-93. {CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62. When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. 5-55 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32, for examples of the labels and where they can be found on your vehicle. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. {CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily, it was developed for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-77. {CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. 5-56 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. Traction – AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 5-57 Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. 5-58 Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. {CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for more information. Used Replacement Wheels {CAUTION: Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. 5-59 Tire Chains {CAUTION: Accessory Inflator Your vehicle has an accessory inflator. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper pressure. Do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. The accessory inflator is located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side. To access the accessory inflator, do the following: Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires. 3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever out. 5-60 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-22 for more information. 2. Lift the lever to move the third row rear seatback forward. See Third Row Seat on page 1-12 for more information. This symbol is on the accessory inflator switch. There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in the rear compartment on the passenger’s side. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage and nozzle adapters. If the accessory inflator system does not turn on or the light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-87 or see your dealer for service. {CAUTION: Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After about one minute you can use the system again. Press the switch and the indicator light will come on. Inflating something too much can make it explode, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure. Notice: If you run the accessory inflator longer than 30 minutes at a time, you could damage the inflator. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Run the inflator for short periods of time only. To use your accessory inflator system, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the accessory inflator. To turn off the inflator, do the following: 2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. 1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet. 3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish to inflate. 2. Put the protective cap back on. 4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. 5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet. 6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the switch will come on to show the system is working. 3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in the rear compartment on the passenger’s side. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the bottom of the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover. 5-61 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would; use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. {CAUTION: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6 for more information. 5-62 {CAUTION: When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks. Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. The following information will tell you next how to use the jack and change a tire. 5-63 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The tools you will need are located in the storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle, on the passenger’s side. To remove the tools, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-22 for more information. 2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped. 5-64 3. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting the tab and pulling the cover off. A. B. C. D. Jack Strap Bracket Wing Nut E. Jacking Instructions F. Bag and Tools G. Tire Bag and Cable Storage 4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (F) by loosening and then removing the wing nut (D) and bracket (C). 5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and remove the jacking tools, including the folding wrench and extension, from the pouch. To remove the compact spare tire, do the following: The tools you will be using include the jack (A), extension (B), and folding wrench (C). The compact spare tire is located under the rear of the vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-77 for more information about the compact spare. A. B. C. D. Hoist Shaft Hoist Assembly Retainer Compact Spare Tire E. Extension (Chisel End) F. Folding Wrench 1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to the extension (E) and insert the chisel end on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft (A). 5-65 2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower the compact spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wrench so the compact spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. After removing the compact spare tire, turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up. You can not store a full-size tire under the vehicle. It should be stowed inside the vehicle by the cable provided. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-74 for more information. 4. Remove the compact spare tire from the cable. If the compact spare tire will not lower, check under the vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose and the cable end and spring under the wheel plate are missing. If so, the secondary latch system is engaged. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-72. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-67. 3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable to remove the compact spare tire, so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening. 5-66 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire If the wheel has a center cap, use the handle of the folding wrench to pry it off. Then, with the other end of the folding wrench, loosen the nuts. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove them — using the folding wrench. Turn the handle counterclockwise about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn. For wheels equipped with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and folding wrench. The key is supplied in the front passenger door pocket. If your vehicle has the plastic bolt-on wheel covers, loosen the bolts completely using the folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover. Once the center cap and/or wheel cover are removed, use the following steps to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire. Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and you use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts, you could damage the lock nut or wheel lock key. Do not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks. Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly, you could damage your vehicle. When raising your vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rear axle control arms. 5-67 Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could break the molding and/or cause other damage to your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located inboard from the rocker molding. 3. Do not raise the vehicle yet. 4. Put the compact spare tire near you. {CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. {CAUTION: 2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B) in the vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rocker molding. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire. 5-68 Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 5. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B), and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm). 6. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 5-69 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. {CAUTION: Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. {CAUTION: Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 5-70 9. Install the compact spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. 10. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-71 {CAUTION: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-93 for wheel nut torque specification. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-93 for the wheel nut torque specification. 5-72 11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. 12. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. Secondary Latch System Your vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop a tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoist assembly to store either the compact spare or a flat road tire. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-74 for instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly. To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do the following: {CAUTION: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed below. {CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the spare. 1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the compact spare tire. 2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch device under the wheel plate. 3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary latch has released. 5-73 4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the compact spare tire is resting on the folding wrench. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools {CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands and pull it out from under the vehicle. 6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding wrench and jack. 5-74 {CAUTION: 3. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place it in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the front of the vehicle. The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards, its secondary latch won’t work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened when your vehicle was being driven, the tire might contact a person or another vehicle, causing injury and, of course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down. To store the flat tire in the vehicle, do the following: 1. Remove the tire storage bag and cable package from the jack storage area. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. A. Cable B. Liftgate Hinges C. Door Striker 4. Pull the cable through the door striker and the center of the wheel. 5-75 5. Hook the cable onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinges. To store the tools, do the following: 6. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure. 7. Make sure the metal tube is centered at the striker. Push the tube towards the front of the vehicle. A. Strap B. Bag and Tools C. Jack 8. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latched properly. 5-76 Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs on the right of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench. Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again. Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on your compact spare. Appearance Care Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled in an enclosed space. When anything from a container is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning the inside. 5-77 Never use these to clean the vehicle: • • • • • • • • • Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous — some more than others —and they can all damage the vehicle, too. Do not use any of these products unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage the vehicle: • • • • Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Here are some cleaning tips: • Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. • Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set. • Carefully scrape off any excess stain. • Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. • To avoid forming a ring on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To clean, use the following instructions: 1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For solids: remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush. 2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water. 3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric too wet. 5-78 4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect. 5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. 6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth. Using Cleaner on Fabric 1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of the fabric. 2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For solids: remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush. 3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the fabric. 4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect. Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee, egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, and blood can be removed using the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry. Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. 3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on Fabric” instructions described earlier. Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth. 5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. • Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This 6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth. • Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if 7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section. may have to be done more than once. they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product. 5-79 Leather Glass Surfaces Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. • For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. • Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather. • Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish. 5-80 Glass should be cleaned often. Your GM dealer can provide an approved cleaner, or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-84. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. {CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Weatherstrips Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-81. Washing Your Vehicle Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-84. The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention, and durability. The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-84. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Finish Care Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle. The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. 5-81 Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather, and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible. Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. 5-82 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only. Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Finish Damage Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Tires Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop. To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle. 5-83 Underbody Maintenance Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. 5-84 Description Usage Polishing Cloth Wax-Treated Interior and exterior polishing cloth. Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt. Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome or stainless steel. White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls. Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints. Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers. Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints, and surface contaminants. Spray on and wipe off. Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, fine scratches, and other light surface contamination. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and protects finish. Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects in one step. No wiping necessary. Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free. Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl, and cloth upholstery. Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet. Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. See your General Motors parts department for these products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. 5-85 Engine Identification Electrical System The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. Add-On Electrical Equipment Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find the following: • • • • VIN Model designation Paint information Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66. Production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by four internal fuses in the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. 5-86 Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal fuse in the underhood fuse block. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed. The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links. The rear washer pump is controlled by a relay located in the engine compartment, behind the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The rear wiper motor is protected by a fuse located in the instrument panel fuse block. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the underhood fuse block. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the right amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the instrument panel fuse block and the underhood fuse block. 5-87 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed. 5-88 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage 1 Trunk, Door Locks 20 Park Lamps 2 Electronic Level Control 21 Power Sliding Door 3 Rear Wiper 22 Blank 4 Radio Amplifier 23 Blank 5 Interior Lamps 24 Left Power Sliding Door 6 OnStar® 25 Right Power Sliding Door 7 Keyless Entry Module 8 Cluster, Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 9 Cruise Switch 10 Steering Wheel Illumination 11 Power Mirror 12 Stoplamp, Turn Lamps 13 Heated Seats 14 Blank 15 Electronic Level Control 16 Heated Mirror 17 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp, Back-up Lamps 18 Blank 19 Canister Ventilation Relays Usage 26 Blank 27 Blank 28 Park Lamps 29 Retained Accessory Power 30 Rear Defog PLR Fuse Puller Circuit Breakers Usage 31 Power Seats 32 Power Window 5-89 Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. For more information on location see Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12. Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed. 5-90 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage 1 Right High Beam 13 Anti-lock Brake System 2 Fuel Pump 14 Powertrain Control Module Ignition 3 Diode 15 Electronic Ignition SPARE Spare 16 Fuel Injector SPARE Spare 17 Climate Control, RPA, Cruise Control 18 Electronic Throttle Control 19 Engine Sensor, Evaporator 20 Airbag 21 Not Used 22 Emission, All-Wheel Drive 23 Auxiliary Power 24 Front Windshield Washer 25 AC/DC Inverter 26 Rear Blower 4 Left High Beam SPARE Spare SPARE Spare SPARE Spare 5 Not Used 6 Air Conditioning Clutch 7 Horn 8 Left Low Beam 9 Powertrain Control Module, Electronic Throttle Control 10 Not Used 27 Front Blower 11 Transmission Solenoid 28 Front Windshield Wiper 12 Right Low Beam 5-91 J-Case Fuses PLR Usage Relays Fuse Puller RUN RLY Starter 29 Fan 1 LO BEAM Low Beam 30 Starter Solenoid FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump 31 Anti-lock Brake System Motor 32 Blank AC/CLTCH 33 Fan 2 HI BEAM High Beam 34 Front Blower High PWR/TRN Powertrain 35 Battery Main 3 WPR2 Wiper 2 36 Rear Defogger WPR1 Wiper 1 37 Battery Main 2 FAN 1 Fan 1 38 Battery Main 1 CRNK Crank HORN IGN MAIN Horn Air Conditioning Clutch Ignition Main FAN2 Fan 2 FAN3 Fan 3 BLANK 5-92 Usage Not Used Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information. Capacities Application Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant Systems Front A/C 1.7 lbs 0.8 kg Front and Rear A/C 2.2 lbs 1.0 kg Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement 7.4 quarts 7.0 L AWD Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and 8.7 quarts 8.3 L Replacement Cooling System Front A/C 11.3 quarts 10.7 L Front and Rear A/C 12.8 quarts 12.2 L Engine Oil with Filter 4.5 quarts 4.3 L Fuel Capacity Regular 20.0 gallons 75.7 L Extended 25.1 gallons 95.0 L Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Engine 3.5L V6 English VIN Code 8 Transaxle Automatic Spark Plug Gap 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 5-93 ✍ NOTES 5-94 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Introduction ...................................................6-2 Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3 Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9 At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13 Maintenance Record .....................................6-14 6-1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty. Your Vehicle and the Environment Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details. 6-2 Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly. Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer. This schedule is for vehicles that: The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 should be performed when indicated. See Additional Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. {CAUTION: Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified technician do the work. • carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on the tire and loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs. When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your service needs, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts. If you want to purchase service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. 6-3 Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what should be checked, when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine GM parts. Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on, it means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. 6-4 If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system. When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears, certain services, checks and inspections are required. Required services are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often. Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year. Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control Service. • • Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • • Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • • Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (g). • Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-54. • • Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • • Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. • • Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. • • Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. • Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). • 6-5 Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (41 500) 50,000 (83 000) 75,000 (125 000) 100,000 (166 000) 125,000 (207 500) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • • • • • Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. An Emission Control Service. • • • Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • • Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter (normal service). • Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. • Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). • Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. • 6-6 Maintenance Footnotes † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage and the underbody contact points and linkage. (a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year. (d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, liftgate hinges, fuel door hinge, power sliding door cable and sliding door track(s). More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak. 6-7 (g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. Owner Checks and Services (h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these checks and services. (i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. At Each Fuel Fill (j) Check system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables. Engine Oil Level Check (k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty. 6-8 Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further details. Engine Coolant Level Check At Least Once a Year Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for further details. Starter Switch Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-47 for further details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62. Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-54. {CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-37 if necessary. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service. 6-9 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System Check {CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-37 if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service. 6-10 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). • The key should come out only in LOCK. Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P) Mechanism Check {CAUTION: When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer. Usage • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is required. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Engine Oil Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13. 50/50 mixture of clean, water and use only Engine Coolant drinkable DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21. Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Windshield ® Washer Solvent. Washer Solvent GM Optikleen 6-11 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Power Steering Fluid Power Steering GM (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transaxle DEXRON®-III Automatic Transmission Fluid. Look for “Approved for the H-Specification” on the label. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Carrier Assembly – Differential (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) 6-12 VERSATRAK® Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045). Usage Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Fluid/Lubricant Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges, Rear Folding Seat, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube Fuel Door (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Hinge, Liftgate in Canada 10953474). Hinges, Power Sliding Door Cable Sliding Door Track Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 12565752 A-2946C Engine Oil Filter 25010792 PF-47 Spark Plugs 12568387 41-101 Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 15192143 — Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 15192144 — Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm) 15192147 — Part Wiper Blades (Hook Type) 6-13 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date 6-14 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-15 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date 6-16 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Online Owner Center ......................................7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ...............................................7-4 Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5 Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5 Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ..................................................7-9 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ..........................7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ................................7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .........................................7-11 Service Publications Ordering Information ...............................................7-11 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your GM dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). 7-2 We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: • Vehicle Identification Number. This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel. • Dealership name and location • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Buick, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address: BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program. Online Owner Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one place. The Online Owner Center allows you to: • Get e-mail service reminders. • Access information about your specific vehicle, including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner’s manual (United States only). • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and maintenance schedule. • Find GM dealers for service nationwide. • Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members (United States only). Refer to the web for updated information. To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com (United States) or My GM Canada within www.gmcanada.com (Canada). 7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. Customer Assistance Offices Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Buick, the letter should be addressed to Buick’s Customer Assistance Center. United States — Customer Assistance Buick Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-5136 1-800-521-7300 1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112 Fax Number: 313-381-0022 7-4 From Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Fax Number: 313-381-0022 From U.S. Virgin Islands 1-800-496-9994 Fax Number: 313-381-0022 Canada — Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 Overseas — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and wheelchair/scooter lifts. The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. Roadside Assistance Program Call 1-800-252-1112 for Buick Roadside Assistance. As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Buick Roadside Assistance program. This value-added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. Call Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number at 1-800-252-1112 to speak with a Buick Roadside Assistance representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. We will provide the following services during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense to you: • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel, $5 maximum, for the customer to get to the nearest service station. • Lock-out Service (identification required): Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km). 7-5 • Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow. • Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be covered at no charge. The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure. • Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge. • Dealer Locator Service In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any payment obligations you might incur. For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance Representative: • Your name, home address, and home telephone number. • Telephone number of your location. • Location of the vehicle. 7-6 • Model, year, color, and license plate number. • Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number, and delivery date of the vehicle. • Description of the problem. While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438. Buick reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’s judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence. Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Buick reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book. Courtesy Transportation Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles. The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs. Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair. Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following: Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership. 7-7 Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as a taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five-day maximum may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30 a day and must be supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair. Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. 7-8 Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants. Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems, such as those commonly called event data recorders (EDR). To read this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required. GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than: In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data related to engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance, and the severity of a collision. This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety. • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, • in response to an official request of police or similar government office, • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process, or • as required by law. In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may: • use the data for GM research needs, • make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown, or • share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non-GM organizations for research purposes. 7-9 Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline. Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. 7-10 If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify us. Service Manuals Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write: Buick Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-5136 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). 7-11 Owner’s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Current and Past Model Order Forms Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. 7-12 A Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-60 Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-23 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................................................... 1-67 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-86 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17 Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-25 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-35 Readiness Light .......................................... 3-34 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9 Airbag System ................................................ 1-54 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ................................................... 1-67 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-60 Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-62 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-60 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-61 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-59 Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-56 All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-41 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-36 All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-12 Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-114 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..................................................... 3-114 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-38 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-77 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-82 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-80 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-84 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-81 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-78 Finish Care ................................................. 5-81 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-83 Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-80 Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-80 Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-80 Leather ...................................................... 5-80 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-83 Tires .......................................................... 5-83 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-84 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-84 Vinyl .......................................................... 5-79 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-81 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-81 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-82 Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-77 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-112 Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-114 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-113 1 Audio System(s) (cont.) Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-114 Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-96 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-77 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-110 Setting the Time .......................................... 3-77 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-112 Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-113 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-114 Automatic Transaxle Fluid .......................................................... 5-19 Operation ................................................... 2-33 B Battery .......................................................... 5-36 Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-24 Brake Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7 Emergencies ................................................ 4-8 Parking ...................................................... 2-37 System Warning Light .................................. 3-37 Brakes .......................................................... 5-33 Braking ........................................................... 4-6 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-30 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-42 2 Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime Running Lamps ........................................ Halogen Bulbs ............................................ Replacement Bulbs ...................................... Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ........................................ Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-44 5-43 5-46 5-45 5-56 C California Fuel .................................................. 5-6 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-93 Captain Chairs, Rear ........................................ 1-7 Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-22, 2-40, 4-27, 4-39 Care of Safety Belts ................................................ 5-80 Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-114 Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-113 Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-19 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-60 Charging System Light .................................... 3-37 Check Engine Light ............................................... 3-40 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-84 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-40 Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-37 Child Restraints (cont.) Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) .......................... Older Children ............................................. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ................................... Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ........................................... Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ................................... Top Strap ................................................... Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ Where to Put the Restraint ........................... Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. Fabric/Carpet .............................................. Finish Care ................................................. Glass Surfaces ............................................ Instrument Panel ......................................... Interior Plastic Components ........................... Leather ...................................................... Tires .......................................................... Underbody Maintenance ............................... Vinyl .......................................................... Washing Your Vehicle ................................... Weatherstrips .............................................. Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 1-46 1-34 1-48 1-48 1-50 1-44 1-45 1-43 5-82 5-81 5-78 5-81 5-80 5-80 5-80 5-80 5-83 5-84 5-79 5-81 5-81 5-82 Climate Control System Dual .......................................................... 3-25 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28 Rear .......................................................... 3-29 Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-31 Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-77 Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-26 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6 Convenience Center ........................................ 2-53 Convenience Net ............................................ 2-52 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-39 Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-32 Cooling System .............................................. 5-26 Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-43 Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-49 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ............................................ 7-10 3 Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ............................................ 7-10 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5 Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11 D Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp System ...................................................... 3-15 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-18 Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-12 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17 Door Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12 Dual Sliding Doors ....................................... 2-13 Locks ........................................................ 2-10 Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11 Power Sliding Door ...................................... 2-16 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-13 Driver Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-21 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-46 DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-68 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 4 Driving At Night ..................................................... 4-18 City ........................................................... 4-22 Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Drunken ....................................................... 4-3 Freeway ..................................................... 4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-25 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-19 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-32 Winter ........................................................ 4-27 Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-25 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-96 E Eight-Way Power Seats ..................................... 1-4 Electrical System Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-86 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-87 Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-86 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-88 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-87 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-90 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-87 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-17 Battery ....................................................... 5-36 Engine (cont.) Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-40 Coolant ...................................................... 5-21 Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-32 Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-39 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-40 Oil ............................................................. 5-13 Oil Life System ........................................... 5-16 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-26 Overheating ................................................ 5-24 Starting ...................................................... 2-31 Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-17 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9 Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-34 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14 F Filter Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17 Finish Damage ............................................... 5-83 Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-114 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8 Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-62 Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62 Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-74 Fluid Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19 Power Steering ........................................... 5-32 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32 Folding Tray ................................................... 2-51 Front Console Storage Area ............................. 2-50 Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Additives ...................................................... 5-6 California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10 Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7 Gage ......................................................... 3-44 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5 Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-44 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-87 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-88 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-90 Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-87 5 G Gage Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-39 Fuel .......................................................... 3-44 Speedometer .............................................. 3-33 Tachometer ................................................. 3-33 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-44 Gasoline Octane ........................................................ 5-5 Specifications ............................................... 5-5 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-48 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5 H Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7 Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-86 Headlamps Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-42 Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp System .................................... 3-15 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime Running Lamps ........................................ 5-44 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-43 Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................ 5-43 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 6 Headlamps (cont.) On Reminder .............................................. 3-15 Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-15 Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................... 5-43 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4 Heater ........................................................... 3-25 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-44 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-25 Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-25 HomeLink® Wireless Control System ................. 2-44 HomeLink® Wireless Control System Operation ..... 2-45 Hood Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 Release ..................................................... 5-11 Horn ............................................................... 3-6 How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-21 I Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-30 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-37 Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-53 Instrument Panel Brightness .................................................. 3-16 Cluster ....................................................... 3-32 Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-17 J Jump Starting ................................................. 5-36 K Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4 Keys ............................................................... 2-3 L Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... Lamps Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... Cargo ........................................................ Dome ........................................................ Exterior ...................................................... Front Reading ............................................. Interior Control ............................................ Rear Reading ............................................. LATCH System Child Restraints ........................................... Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ................................... Level Control .................................................. Liftgate .......................................................... 5-48 3-19 3-19 3-17 3-14 3-19 3-17 3-19 1-46 1-48 4-39 2-22 Light Airbag Readiness ........................................ Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... Brake System Warning ................................. Charging System ......................................... Cruise Control ............................................. Highbeam On ............................................. Low Fuel Warning ....................................... Malfunction Indicator .................................... Oil Pressure ............................................... Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. Safety Belt Reminder ................................... Security ..................................................... TCS Warning Light ...................................... Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... Lighting Delayed ..................................................... Entry ......................................................... Exit ........................................................... Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... Lockout Protection .......................................... Locks Delayed Locking .......................................... Door .......................................................... Lockout Protection ....................................... Power Door ................................................ Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 3-34 3-38 3-37 3-37 3-43 3-44 3-44 3-40 3-42 3-35 3-33 3-43 3-39 3-39 3-18 3-17 3-18 4-32 2-13 2-12 2-10 2-13 2-11 2-13 7 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16 Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-44 Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-51 M Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9 At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9 Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4 Using .......................................................... 6-3 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-40 Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-3 Memory Seat ................................................. 2-54 Message DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 8 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-41 Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature ...................................... 3-34 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-42 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-42 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-41 MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3 N Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-96 New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-30 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13 O Odometer ...................................................... 3-33 Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-33 Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14 Oil Engine ....................................................... 5-13 Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42 Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-16 Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-34 Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3 OnStar® System ............................................. 2-42 Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28 Outside Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-42 Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-42 Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-41 Overhead Console .................................. 2-49, 2-50 Overhead Console Switchbank .......................... 3-20 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-26 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii P Park Aid ........................................................ Park (P) Shifting Into ................................................ Shifting Out of ............................................ Parking Assist ........................................................ Brake ........................................................ Over Things That Burn ................................. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... Passenger Sensing System .............................. Passing ......................................................... PASS-Key® III ................................................ PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. Power Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-23 Door Locks ................................................. 2-11 Eight-Way Seats ........................................... 1-4 Electrical System ......................................... 5-87 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-24 Rear Quarter Windows ................................. 2-25 Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-31 Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-3 Sliding Door ................................................ 2-16 Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-32 Windows .................................................... 2-25 Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-34 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-13 3-20 Q 2-38 2-39 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-20 3-20 2-37 2-39 3-35 1-62 4-15 2-28 2-28 R Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-23 Radios .......................................................... 3-77 Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-114 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-113 Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-96 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-77 9 Radios (cont.) Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-110 Setting the Time .......................................... 3-77 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-112 Understanding Reception ............................ 3-113 Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-29 Rear Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-31 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-110 Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-96 Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7 Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-29 Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature ............................................... 3-34 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-41 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-37 Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire .................................................. 5-67 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-64 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-46 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government .................................. 7-10 General Motors ........................................... 7-11 United States Government ............................ 7-10 10 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-67 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .......................................... 1-68 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-31 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-29 Roadside Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-32 Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-40 S Safety Belt Pretensioners .............................................. Reminder Light ............................................ Safety Belts Care of ...................................................... Driver Position ............................................ How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults ......................... Rear Seat Passengers ................................. Right Front Passenger Position ...................... Safety Belt Extender .................................... Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-34 3-33 5-80 1-21 1-21 1-20 1-31 1-29 1-29 1-34 1-28 Safety Belts (cont.) Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-16 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-28 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Seats Captain Chairs .............................................. 1-7 Eight-Way Power Seats .................................. 1-4 Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4 Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-3 Memory ..................................................... 2-54 Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5 Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-3 Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-12 Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-72 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-48 Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-48 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50 Security Light ................................................. 3-43 Service ........................................................... 5-3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Service (cont.) Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-40 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66 Setting the Time ............................................. 3-77 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-83 Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-38 Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-39 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-28 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7 Sliding Door, Power ........................................ 2-16 Sliding Doors, Dual ......................................... 2-13 Spare Tire Installing .................................................... 5-67 Removing ................................................... 5-64 Storing ....................................................... 5-74 Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-93 Speedometer .................................................. 3-33 StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 4-10 Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-31 Steering ........................................................ 4-12 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-112 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6 Storage Areas ................................................ 2-48 Convenience Center ..................................... 2-53 Convenience Net ......................................... 2-52 11 Storage Areas (cont.) Cupholder(s) ............................................... Floor Console Storage Area .......................... Folding Tray ............................................... Glove Box .................................................. Luggage Carrier .......................................... Overhead Console ............................... 2-49, Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... Sun Visors ..................................................... Switchbanks Overhead Console ....................................... 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-48 2-51 2-50 4-31 2-26 3-20 T Tachometer .................................................... 3-33 Taillamps Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-45 TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-39 Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-112 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-26 Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-26 PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-28 PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-28 Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-12 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6 12 Tires ............................................................. Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning ................................................. Buying New Tires ........................................ Chains ....................................................... Changing a Flat Tire .................................... Cleaning .................................................... Compact Spare Tire ..................................... If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... Inspection and Rotation ................................ Installing the Spare Tire ................................ Removing the Flat Tire ................................. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... Secondary Latch System .............................. Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. Wheel Replacement ..................................... When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... Top Strap ...................................................... Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 5-47 5-82 5-56 5-60 5-62 5-83 5-77 5-62 5-53 5-54 5-67 5-67 5-64 5-72 5-74 5-48 5-50 5-57 5-58 5-58 5-55 1-44 1-45 Towing Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-37 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-37 Traction Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9 Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-39 StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 4-10 Transaxle Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19 Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-33 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-33 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7 U V Vehicle Control ........................................................ 4-6 Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Loading ...................................................... 4-32 Symbols ......................................................... iv Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders .................................................... 7-9 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-85 Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-86 Vehicle Personalization DIC ........................................................... 3-68 Memory Seat .............................................. 2-54 Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28 Visors ........................................................... 2-26 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-20 Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-113 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-57 13 W Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6 Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-58 Replacement ............................................... 5-58 Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-43 Windows ....................................................... 2-24 Power ........................................................ 2-25 Power Rear Quarter ..................................... 2-25 Windshield Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-82 Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9 Fluid .......................................................... 5-32 14 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-46 Fuses ........................................................ 5-87 Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-27 Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-15 X XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-114 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2